Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 256

Preface

Fundamental safety
instructions 1

2
SINAMICS General information

Communication via
PROFIBUS and PROFINET 3
SINAMICS G120, G120P, G120C,
G120D, G110M, G115D Communication via
4
Fieldbuses EtherNet/IP

Communication via RS485 5


Function Manual
Communication over
CANopen 6
Communication via AS-i –
only for G110M and G115D 7

Appendix A

Edition 11/2020, Firmware V4.7 SP13

11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13


A5E34229197B AG
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.

DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.

WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.

CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.

NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions.
Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and
avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:

WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended
or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.

Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.

Siemens AG A5E34229197B AG Copyright © Siemens AG 2014 - 2020.


Digital Industries Ⓟ 12/2020 Subject to change All rights reserved
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Preface

About this manual


This manual describes the settings and preconditions that are required to communicate with
a higher-level control system with the subsequently listed fieldbus systems.

Fieldbuses for SINAMICS G120


• PROFIBUS DP
• PROFINET
• EtherNet/IP
• USS
• Modbus RTU
• CANopen

Additional fieldbuses for SINAMICS G120P


• BACnet MS/TP
• P1

Additional fieldbuses for SINAMICS G110M


• AS-Interface

Fieldbuses for SINAMICS G115D


• PROFINET
• EtherNet/IP
• AS-Interface

What is the meaning of the symbols in the manual?


Reference to further information in the manual
Download from the Internet
DVD that can be ordered
End of a handling instruction.

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 3
Preface

Fieldbuses
4 Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG
Table of contents

Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 3
1 Fundamental safety instructions ........................................................................................................... 9
1.1 General safety instructions ................................................................................................... 9
1.2 Warranty and liability for application examples ................................................................... 10
1.3 Security information .......................................................................................................... 11
2 General information ............................................................................................................................ 13
2.1 Ethernet and PROFINET protocols that are used .................................................................. 14
3 Communication via PROFIBUS and PROFINET ..................................................................................... 17
3.1 PROFIDRIVE profile - Cyclic communication......................................................................... 17
3.1.1 Assigning control and status words .................................................................................... 21
3.1.1.1 Control and status word 1 .................................................................................................. 21
3.1.1.2 Control and status word 2 .................................................................................................. 24
3.1.1.3 Control and status word 3 .................................................................................................. 25
3.1.2 NAMUR message word ....................................................................................................... 27
3.1.3 Control and status word, encoder ...................................................................................... 28
3.1.4 Position actual value of the encoder ................................................................................... 30
3.1.5 Extend telegrams and change signal interconnection ......................................................... 32
3.1.6 Data structure of the parameter channel ............................................................................ 37
3.1.6.1 Application examples ......................................................................................................... 46
3.1.7 Slave-to-slave communication............................................................................................ 48
3.2 PROFIDRIVE profile - Acyclic communication ....................................................................... 49
3.3 PROFIdrive profile - Diagnostic channels ............................................................................. 54
3.3.1 Diagnostics with PROFINET ................................................................................................ 55
3.3.2 Diagnostics with PROFIBUS ................................................................................................ 57
3.4 Identification & maintenance data (I&M) ............................................................................ 61
3.5 S7 communication ............................................................................................................. 62
3.5.1 Directly accessing a SINAMICS G120 converter from a SIMATIC panel.................................. 62
3.6 Communication via PROFINET ............................................................................................ 66
3.6.1 Converter with PROFINET interface..................................................................................... 68
3.6.2 Integrating converters into PROFINET ................................................................................. 70
3.6.3 PROFINET IO operation....................................................................................................... 71
3.6.3.1 What do you have to set for communication via PROFINET? ................................................ 71
3.6.3.2 Configuring communication to the control ......................................................................... 71
3.6.3.3 Installing GSDML ............................................................................................................... 73
3.6.3.4 Activating diagnostics via the control ................................................................................. 73
3.6.4 PROFIenergy ...................................................................................................................... 74
3.6.4.1 Energy-saving mode .......................................................................................................... 74
3.6.4.2 Control commands ............................................................................................................ 75
3.6.4.3 Status queries .................................................................................................................... 76
3.6.4.4 Error values and measured values ...................................................................................... 77

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 5
Table of contents

3.6.5 The converter with PROFINET interface as Ethernet node. ................................................... 78


3.7 Communication via PROFIBUS ............................................................................................ 80
3.7.1 Converters with PROFIBUS interface ................................................................................... 81
3.7.2 What do you have to set for communication via PROFIBUS? ................................................ 83
3.7.3 Integrating converters into PROFIBUS ................................................................................. 84
3.7.4 Configuring communication to the control system ............................................................. 84
3.7.4.1 Configuring the communication using SIMATIC S7 control.................................................. 84
3.7.4.2 Configuring the communication with a third-party control system ...................................... 84
3.7.4.3 Installing the GSD .............................................................................................................. 85
3.7.5 Set the PROFIBUS address .................................................................................................. 86
3.8 Select telegram.................................................................................................................. 87
4 Communication via EtherNet/IP .......................................................................................................... 89
4.1 Converters with Ethernet/IP interface ................................................................................. 90
4.2 Connect converter to EtherNet/IP ....................................................................................... 92
4.3 What do you need for communication via EtherNet/IP? ....................................................... 93
4.4 Configuring communication .............................................................................................. 94
4.5 Supported objects .............................................................................................................. 96
4.5.1 Supported ODVA AC/DC assemblies .................................................................................. 109
4.6 Create generic I/O module ............................................................................................... 110
4.7 The converter as an Ethernet station ................................................................................ 111
5 Communication via RS485 ................................................................................................................. 113
5.1 Converter with RS485 interface........................................................................................ 114
5.2 Integrating converters into a bus system via the RS485 interface ...................................... 116
5.3 Communication via USS ................................................................................................... 117
5.3.1 Basic settings for communication ..................................................................................... 117
5.3.1.1 Setting the address .......................................................................................................... 118
5.3.1.2 Parameters to set communication via USS ........................................................................ 119
5.3.2 Telegram structure .......................................................................................................... 120
5.3.3 Specify user data of telegram ........................................................................................... 121
5.3.4 USS parameter channel.................................................................................................... 122
5.3.4.1 Telegram examples, length of the parameter channel = 4................................................. 126
5.3.5 USS process data channel (PZD) ....................................................................................... 128
5.3.6 Telegram monitoring ....................................................................................................... 131
5.4 Communication using Modbus RTU .................................................................................. 133
5.4.1 Basic settings for communication ..................................................................................... 134
5.4.1.1 Setting the address .......................................................................................................... 135
5.4.1.2 Parameters for setting communication via Modbus RTU.................................................... 136
5.4.2 Modbus RTU telegram...................................................................................................... 138
5.4.3 Baud rates and mapping tables ........................................................................................ 139
5.4.4 Mapping tables - converter data ....................................................................................... 141
5.4.5 Acyclic communication via Modbus RTU ........................................................................... 144
5.4.6 Write and read access using function codes ...................................................................... 145
5.4.7 Acyclically read and write parameter via FC 16 ................................................................. 148
5.4.7.1 Read parameter ............................................................................................................... 148
5.4.7.2 Write parameter .............................................................................................................. 150

Fieldbuses
6 Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG
Table of contents

5.4.8 Communication procedure............................................................................................... 152


5.4.9 Application example ........................................................................................................ 153
5.5 Communication via BACnet MS/TP - only CU230P-2 HVAC / BT .......................................... 154
5.5.1 Basic settings for communication ..................................................................................... 155
5.5.1.1 Setting the address .......................................................................................................... 156
5.5.1.2 Parameters for setting communication via BACnet............................................................ 157
5.5.2 Supported services and objects ........................................................................................ 159
5.5.3 Acyclic communication (general parameter access) via BACnet ......................................... 167
5.6 Communication via P1 - only CU230P-2 HVAC, CU230P-2 BT............................................. 169
5.6.1 Basic settings for communication via P1 ........................................................................... 170
5.6.2 Setting the address .......................................................................................................... 171
5.6.3 Point numbers ................................................................................................................. 172
6 Communication over CANopen ......................................................................................................... 177
6.1 Network management (NMT service) ............................................................................... 180
6.2 SDO services .................................................................................................................... 183
6.2.1 Access to SINAMICS parameters via SDO .......................................................................... 184
6.2.2 Access PZD objects via SDO .............................................................................................. 185
6.3 PDO services .................................................................................................................... 187
6.3.1 Predefined connection set................................................................................................ 191
6.3.2 Free PDO mapping ........................................................................................................... 193
6.3.3 Interconnect objects from the receive and transmit buffers .............................................. 197
6.3.4 Free PDO mapping for example of the actual current value and torque limit ..................... 199
6.4 CANopen operating modes .............................................................................................. 201
6.5 RAM to ROM via the CANopen object 1010....................................................................... 203
6.6 Object directories ............................................................................................................ 204
6.6.1 General objects from the CiA 301 communication profile ................................................. 204
6.6.2 Free objects ..................................................................................................................... 213
6.6.3 Objects from the CiA 402 drive profile .............................................................................. 214
6.7 Integrating the converter into CANopen ........................................................................... 216
6.7.1 Connecting converter to CAN bus..................................................................................... 217
6.7.2 Setting the node ID and baud rate .................................................................................... 217
6.7.3 Setting the monitoring of the communication .................................................................. 218
6.8 Error diagnostics .............................................................................................................. 220
6.9 CAN bus sampling time .................................................................................................... 224
7 Communication via AS-i – only for G110M and G115D ..................................................................... 227
7.1 Setting the address .......................................................................................................... 229
7.2 Single Slave mode ........................................................................................................... 231
7.3 Dual Slave mode .............................................................................................................. 233
7.4 Assignment tables ........................................................................................................... 236
7.5 Cyclic and acyclic communication via CTT2 ....................................................................... 238
7.5.1 Cyclic communication ...................................................................................................... 239
7.5.2 Acyclic communication - standard .................................................................................... 240
7.5.3 Acyclic communication - manufacturer-specific ................................................................ 240

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 7
Table of contents

A Appendix ........................................................................................................................................... 243


A.1 Application examples for communication with STEP7 ....................................................... 243
A.2 Manuals and technical support......................................................................................... 244
A.2.1 Overview of the manuals ................................................................................................. 244
A.2.2 Configuring support......................................................................................................... 248
A.2.3 Product Support............................................................................................................... 249
Index .................................................................................................................................................. 251

Fieldbuses
8 Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG
Fundamental safety instructions 1
1.1 General safety instructions

WARNING
Danger to life if the safety instructions and residual risks are not observed
If the safety instructions and residual risks in the associated hardware documentation are
not observed, accidents involving severe injuries or death can occur.
• Observe the safety instructions given in the hardware documentation.
• Consider the residual risks for the risk evaluation.

WARNING
Malfunctions of the machine as a result of incorrect or changed parameter settings
As a result of incorrect or changed parameterization, machines can malfunction, which in
turn can lead to injuries or death.
• Protect the parameterization against unauthorized access.
• Handle possible malfunctions by taking suitable measures, e.g. emergency stop or
emergency off.

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 9
Fundamental safety instructions
1.2 Warranty and liability for application examples

1.2 Warranty and liability for application examples


Application examples are not binding and do not claim to be complete regarding
configuration, equipment or any eventuality which may arise. Application examples do not
represent specific customer solutions, but are only intended to provide support for typical
tasks.
As the user you yourself are responsible for ensuring that the products described are
operated correctly. Application examples do not relieve you of your responsibility for safe
handling when using, installing, operating and maintaining the equipment.

Fieldbuses
10 Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG
Fundamental safety instructions
1.3 Security information

1.3 Security information


Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the
secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks.
In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is
necessary to implement – and continuously maintain – a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial
security concept. Siemens’ products and solutions constitute one element of such a concept.
Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants, systems,
machines and networks. Such systems, machines and components should only be connected
to an enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent such a connection is necessary
and only when appropriate security measures (e.g. firewalls and/or network segmentation)
are in place.
For additional information on industrial security measures that may be implemented, please
visit
https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).
Siemens’ products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more
secure. Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are
available and that the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are no
longer supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customer’s exposure to
cyber threats.
To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS
Feed under
https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity
(https://new.siemens.com/global/en/products/services/cert.html#Subscriptions).
Further information is provided on the Internet:
Industrial Security Configuration Manual
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/108862708)

WARNING
Unsafe operating states resulting from software manipulation
Software manipulations, e.g. viruses, Trojans, or worms, can cause unsafe operating states
in your system that may lead to death, serious injury, and property damage.
• Keep the software up to date.
• Incorporate the automation and drive components into a holistic, state-of-the-art
industrial security concept for the installation or machine.
• Make sure that you include all installed products into the holistic industrial security
concept.
• Protect files stored on exchangeable storage media from malicious software by with
suitable protection measures, e.g. virus scanners.
• On completion of commissioning, check all security-related settings.

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 11
General information 2
Communication with the control, even when the line voltage is switched off
So that communication with the control system in your plant or system continues to function
even when the line voltage is switched off, you must externally supply the converter/Control
Unit with 24 V DC. To do this, use terminals 31 and 32 or connector X01 (X01/X02 with
G115D). You can find additional details in the operating instructions for the converter or the
Control Unit.

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 13
General information
2.1 Ethernet and PROFINET protocols that are used

2.1 Ethernet and PROFINET protocols that are used


The converter supports the protocols listed in the following tables. The address parameters,
the relevant communication layer as well as the communication role and the communication
direction are specified for each protocol.
You require this information to set the appropriate safety measures to protect the automation
system, e.g. in the firewall.
As the security measures are limited to Ethernet and PROFINET networks, no PROFIBUS
protocols are listed in the table.

Table 2- 1 PROFINET protocols

Protocol Port Layer Function/description


number (2) Link layer
(4) Transport layer
DCP: Not (2) Ethernet II and Accessible stations, PROFINET Discovery and configuration
Discovery and relevant IEEE 802.1Q and DCP is used by PROFINET to determine PROFINET devices and to make
configuration Ethertype 0x8892 basic settings.
protocol (PROFINET)
DCP uses the special multicast MAC address:
xx-xx-xx-01-0E-CF,
xx-xx-xx = Organizationally Unique Identifier
LLDP: Not (2) Ethernet II and PROFINET Link Layer Discovery protocol
Link Layer Dis- relevant IEEE 802.1Q and LLDP is used by PROFINET to determine and manage neighborhood
covery Protocol Ethertype 0x88CC relationships between PROFINET devices.
(PROFINET)
LLDP uses the special multicast MAC address:
01-80-C2-00-00-0E
MRP: Not (2) Ethernet II and PROFINET medium redundancy
Media Redun- relevant IEEE 802.1Q and MRP enables the control of redundant routes through a ring topolo-
dancy Protocol Ethertype 0x88E3 gy.
(PROFINET)
MRP uses the special multicast MAC address:
xx-xx-xx-01-15-4E,
xx-xx-xx = Organizationally Unique Identifier
PTCP Not (2) Ethernet II and PROFINET send clock and time synchronization, based on IEEE
Precision relevant IEEE 802.1Q and 1588
Transparent Ethertype 0x8892 PTC is used to implement send clock synchronization and time syn-
Clock Protocol (PROFINET) chronization between RJ45 ports, which are required for IRT opera-
tion.
PTCP uses the special multicast MAC address:
xx-xx-xx-01-0E-CF,
xx-xx-xx = Organizationally Unique Identifier
PROFINET IO Not (2) Ethernet II and PROFINET Cyclic IO data transfer
data relevant IEEE 802.1Q and The PROFINET IO telegrams are used to transfer IO data cyclically
Ethertype 0x8892 between the PROFINET IO controller and IO devices via Ethernet.
(PROFINET)
PROFINET Con- 34964 (4) UDP PROFINET connection less RPC
text Manager The PROFINET context manager provides an endpoint mapper in
order to establish an application relationship (PROFINET AR).

Fieldbuses
14 Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG
General information
2.1 Ethernet and PROFINET protocols that are used

Table 2- 2 EtherNet/IP protocols

Protocol Port Layer Function/description


number (2) Link layer
(4) Transport layer
Implicit mes- 2222 (4) UDP Used for exchanging I/O data.
saging This is inactive when delivered. Is activated when selecting Ether-
Net/IP.
Explicit mes- 44818 (4) TCP Used for parameter access (writing, reading).
saging (4) UDP This is inactive when delivered. Is activated when selecting Ether-
Net/IP.

Table 2- 3 Connection-oriented communication protocols

Protocol Port Layer Function/description


number (2) Link layer
(4) Transport layer
ISO on TCP 102 (4) TCP ISO-on-TCP protocol
(according to ISO on TCP (according to RFC 1006) is used for the message-oriented
RFC 1006) data exchange to a remote CPU, WinAC or devices of other suppliers.
Communication with ES, HMI, etc. is activated in the factory setting,
and is always required.
SNMP 161 (4) UDP Simple network management protocol
Simple Network SNMP enables network management data to be read out and set
Management (SNMP managed objects) by the SNMP manager.
Protocol It is activated in the factory setting, and is always required
Reserved 49152 ... (4) TCP Dynamic port area that is used for the active connection endpoint if
65535 (4) UDP the application does not specify the local port.

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 15
Communication via PROFIBUS and PROFINET 3
3.1 PROFIDRIVE profile - Cyclic communication
Depending on the Control Unit or converter, there are different telegrams for communication
via PROFIBUS DP or PROFINET IO. The structure of the individual telegrams are listed below.
The Startdrive commissioning tool or an operator panel only list the telegrams for selection
that are possible with your particular converter.
Commissioning the converter and selecting a telegram are described in the operating
instructions.
Overview of the manuals (Page 244)

Communication telegrams if "basic positioner" has been configured


The converter has the following telegrams if you have configured the "Basic positioner"
function:
• Standard telegram 7, PZD-2/2
• Standard telegram 9, PZD-10/5
• SIEMENS telegram 110, PZD-12/7
• SIEMENS telegram 111, PZD-12/12
• Telegram 999, free interconnection
Telegrams 7, 9, 110 and 111 are described in the "Basic positioner" Function Manual
Overview of the manuals (Page 244)

Communication telegrams for speed control


The send and receive telegrams of the converter for closed-loop speed control are structured
as follows:

Figure 3-1 16-bit speed setpoint

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 17
Communication via PROFIBUS and PROFINET
3.1 PROFIDRIVE profile - Cyclic communication

Figure 3-2 32-bit speed setpoint

Figure 3-3 32-bit speed setpoint with 1 position encoder

Figure 3-4 32-bit speed setpoint with 2 position encoders

Figure 3-5 16-bit speed setpoint for VIK-Namur

Figure 3-6 16-bit speed setpoint with torque limiting

Figure 3-7 16-bit speed setpoint for PCS7

Figure 3-8 16-bit speed setpoint with PKW range to read and write parameters

Fieldbuses
18 Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG
Communication via PROFIBUS and PROFINET
3.1 PROFIDRIVE profile - Cyclic communication

Figure 3-9 16-bit speed setpoint for PCS7 with PKW range to read and write parameters

Figure 3-10 Telegram with free interconnection and length

Abbreviation Explanation Abbreviation Explanation


PZD Process data PKW Parameter channel
STW Control word PIST_GLATT Actual active power value, smoothed
ZSW Status word M_LIM Torque limit
NSOLL_A Speed setpoint 16-bit FAULT_CODE Fault code
NSOLL_B Speed setpoint 32-bit WARN_CODE Alarm code
NIST_A Actual speed value 16-bit MELD_NAMUR Message according to the VIK-NAMUR defi-
nition
NIST_B Actual speed value 32-bit G1_STW / Control word for encoder 1 or encoder 2
G2_STW
IAIST Current actual value G1_ZSW / Status word for encoder 1 or encoder 2
G2_ZSW
IAIST_GLATT Current actual value, smoothed G1_XIST1 / Position actual value 1 from encoder 1 or
G2_XIST1 encoder 2
MIST_GLATT Torque actual value, smoothed G1_XIST2 / Position actual value 2 from encoder 1 or
G2_XIST2 encoder 2

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 19
Communication via PROFIBUS and PROFINET
3.1 PROFIDRIVE profile - Cyclic communication

Interconnection of the process data

Figure 3-11 Interconnection of the send words

Figure 3-12 Interconnection of the receive words

The telegrams use - with the exception of telegram 999 (free interconnection) - the word-by-
word transfer of send and receive data (r2050/p2051).
If you require an individual telegram for your application (e.g. for transferring double words),
you can adapt one of the predefined telegrams using parameters p0922 and p2079. For
details, please refer to the List Manual, function diagrams 2420 and 2472.

Fieldbuses
20 Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG
Communication via PROFIBUS and PROFINET
3.1 PROFIDRIVE profile - Cyclic communication

3.1.1 Assigning control and status words


Assigning control and status of words is specified in part by the definitions in the PROFIdrive
profile, Version 4.2 for the "Closed-loop speed control" operating mode; the other part is
assigned depending on the particular manufacturer.
A more detailed description of the individual control and status words is provided in the
following sections.
If you require an individual assignment for your application, you can adapt one of the existing
control and status words using p0922 and p2079.
Extend telegrams and change signal interconnection (Page 32)

3.1.1.1 Control and status word 1


Control word 1 is preassigned as follows:
• Telegrams 1, 2, 3 and 4:
– Bits 0 … 10 corresponding to the PROFIdrive profile,
– Bits 11… 15 manufacturer-specific
• Telegrams 7 and 9:
– Bits 0 … 11 corresponding to the PROFIdrive profile,
– Bits 12 … 15 manufacturer-specific
• Telegram 20 (VIK/NAMUR):
– Bits 0 … 11 corresponding to the PROFIdrive profile
– Bits 12 … 14 reserved
– Bit 15 corresponding to the PROFIdrive profile
Status word 1 is preassigned as follows:
• Telegrams 1, 2, 3 and 4:
– Bits 0 … 10 corresponding to the PROFIdrive profile,
– Bits 11… 15 manufacturer-specific
• Telegrams 7 and 9:
– Bits 0 … 13 corresponding to the PROFIdrive profile,
– Bits 14 … 15 manufacturer-specific
• Telegram 20 (VIK/NAMUR):
– Bits 0 … 11 corresponding to the PROFIdrive profile
– Bit 12 reserved
– Bits 13 … 15 corresponding to the PROFIdrive profile

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 21
Communication via PROFIBUS and PROFINET
3.1 PROFIDRIVE profile - Cyclic communication

Control word 1 (STW1)

Bit Meaning Explanation Signal in-


terconnec-
Telegram 20 All other tele-
tion in the
grams
converter
0 0 = OFF1 The motor brakes with the ramp-down time p0840[0] =
p1121 of the ramp-function generator. The r2090.0
converter switches off the motor at standstill.
0 → 1 = ON The converter goes into the "ready" state. If, in
addition, bit 3 = 1, the converter switches on
the motor.
1 0 = OFF2 Switch off the motor immediately, the motor p0844[0] =
then coasts down to a standstill. r2090.1
1 = No OFF2 The motor can be switched on (ON command).
2 0 = Quick stop (OFF3) Fast stopping p0848[0] =
The motor brakes with the OFF3 ramp-down r2090.2
time p1135 down to standstill.
1 = No quick stop (OFF3) The motor can be switched on (ON command).
3 0 = Inhibit operation Immediately switch-off motor (cancel pulses). p0852[0] =
1 = Enable operation Switch-on motor (pulses can be enabled). r2090.3
4 0 = Disable RFG The converter immediately sets its ramp- p1140[0] =
function generator output to 0. r2090.4
1 = Do not disable RFG The ramp-function generator can be enabled.
5 0 = Stop RFG The output of the ramp-function generator p1141[0] =
stops at the actual value. r2090.5
1 = Enable RFG The output of the ramp-function generator
follows the setpoint.
6 0 = Inhibit setpoint The converter brakes the motor with the ramp- p1142[0] =
down time p1121 of the ramp-function gener- r2090.6
ator.
1 = Enable setpoint Motor accelerates with the ramp-up time
p1120 to the setpoint.
7 0 → 1 = Acknowledge faults Acknowledge fault. If the ON command is still p2103[0] =
active, the converter switches to the "switch- r2090.7
ing on inhibited" state.
8, 9 Reserved
10 0 = No control via PLC Converter ignores the process data from the p0854[0] =
fieldbus. r2090.10
1 = Control via PLC Control via fieldbus, converter accepts the
process data from the fieldbus.
11 1 = Direction reversal Invert setpoint in the converter. p1113[0] =
r2090.11
12 Not used
13 ---1) 1 = MOP up Increase the setpoint saved in the motorized p1035[0] =
potentiometer. r2090.13
14 ---1) 1 = MOP down Reduce the setpoint saved in the motorized p1036[0] =
potentiometer. r2090.14
15 CDS bit 0 Reserved Changes over between settings for different p0810 =
operation interfaces (command data sets). r2090.15
1) If you change over from another telegram to telegram 20, then the assignment of the previous
telegram is kept.

Fieldbuses
22 Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG
Communication via PROFIBUS and PROFINET
3.1 PROFIDRIVE profile - Cyclic communication

Status word 1 (ZSW1)

Bit Meaning Remarks Signal in-


terconnec-
Telegram 20 All other tele-
tion in the
grams
converter
0 1 = Ready for switching on Power supply switched on; electronics initial- p2080[0] =
ized; pulses locked. r0899.0
1 1 = Ready Motor is switched on (ON/OFF1 = 1), no fault p2080[1] =
is active. With the command "Enable opera- r0899.1
tion" (STW1.3), the converter switches on the
motor.
2 1 = Operation enabled Motor follows setpoint. See control word 1, p2080[2] =
bit 3. r0899.2
3 1 = Fault active The converter has a fault. Acknowledge fault p2080[3] =
using STW1.7. r2139.3
4 1 = OFF2 inactive Coast down to standstill is not active. p2080[4] =
r0899.4
5 1 = OFF3 inactive Quick stop is not active. p2080[5] =
r0899.5
6 1 = Switching on inhibited active It is only possible to switch on the motor after p2080[6] =
an OFF1 followed by ON. r0899.6
7 1 = Alarm active Motor remains switched on; no acknowl- p2080[7] =
edgement is necessary. r2139.7
8 1 = Speed deviation within the Setpoint / actual value deviation within the p2080[8] =
tolerance range tolerance range. r2197.7
9 1 = Master control requested The automation system is requested to accept p2080[9] =
the converter control. r0899.9
10 1 = Comparison speed reached or Speed is greater than or equal to the corre- p2080[10] =
exceeded sponding maximum speed. r2199.1
11 1 = current or 1 = torque limit Comparison value for current or torque has p2080[11] =
torque limit reached been reached or exceeded. r0056.13 /
reached r1407.7
12 ---1) 1 = Holding Signal to open and close a motor holding p2080[12] =
brake open brake. r0899.12
13 0 = Alarm, motor overtemperature -- p2080[13] =
r2135.14
14 1 = Motor rotates clockwise Internal converter actual value > 0 p2080[14] =
0 = Motor rotates counter- Internal converter actual value < 0 r2197.3
clockwise
15 1 = CDS display 0 = Alarm, con- -- p2080[15] =
verter thermal r0836.0 /
overload r2135.15
1) If you change over from another telegram to telegram 20, then the assignment of the previous
telegram is kept.

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 23
Communication via PROFIBUS and PROFINET
3.1 PROFIDRIVE profile - Cyclic communication

3.1.1.2 Control and status word 2


Control word 2 is preassigned as follows:
• Bits 0 … 11 manufacturer-specific
• Bits 12 … 15 corresponding to the PROFIdrive profile
Status word 2 is preassigned as follows:
• Bits 0 … 11 manufacturer-specific
• Bits 12 … 15 corresponding to the PROFIdrive profile

Control word 2 (STW2)

Bit Meaning Signal interconnection in the


converter
Telegrams 2, 3 and 4 Telegrams 9, 110 and 111
0 1 = drive data set selection DDS bit 0 p0820[0] = r2093.0
1 1 = drive data set selection DDS bit 1 p0821[0] = r2093.1
2…6 Reserved
7 1 = parking axis is selected p0897 = r2093.7
8 1 = travel to fixed stop Reserved p1545[0] = r2093.8
active
9…11 Reserved
12 1 = master sign-of-life bit 0 p2045 = r2050[3]
13 1 = master sign-of-life bit 1
14 1 = master sign-of-life bit 3
15 1 = master sign-of-life bit 4

Status word 2 (ZSW2)

Bit Meaning Signal interconnection in the


converter
0 1 = Drive data set DDS effective, bit 0 p2081[0] = r0051.0
1 1 = Drive data set DDS effective, bit 1 p2081[1] = r0051.1
2…4 Reserved
5 1 = Alarm class bit 0 p2081[5] = r2139.11
6 1 = alarm class bit 1 p2081[6] = r2139.12
7 Reserved
8 1 = travel to fixed stop active p2081[8] = r1406.8
9 Reserved
10 1 = pulses enabled p2081[10] = r0899.11
11 Reserved
12 Slave sign-of-life bit 0 Internally interconnected
13 Slave sign of life bit 1
14 Slave sign of life bit 2
15 Slave sign of life bit 3

Fieldbuses
24 Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG
Communication via PROFIBUS and PROFINET
3.1 PROFIDRIVE profile - Cyclic communication

3.1.1.3 Control and status word 3


Control word 3 is preassigned as follows:
• Bits 0 … 15 manufacturer-specific
Status word 3 is preassigned as follows:
• Bits 0 … 15 manufacturer-specific

Control word 3 (STW3)

Bit Meaning Explanation Signal interconnec-


tion in the converter
Telegram 350
1)

0 1 = fixed setpoint bit 0 Selects up to 16 different fixed p1020[0] = r2093.0


1 1 = fixed setpoint bit 1 setpoints. p1021[0] = r2093.1
2 1 = fixed setpoint bit 2 p1022[0] = r2093.2
3 1 = fixed setpoint bit 3 p1023[0] = r2093.3
4 1 = DDS selection bit 0 Changes over between settings p0820 = r2093.4
5 1 = DDS selection bit 1 for different motors (drive data p0821 = r2093.5
sets).
6 Not used
7 Not used
8 1 = technology controller enable -- p2200[0] = r2093.8
9 1 = enable DC braking -- p1230[0] = r2093.9
10 Not used
11 1 = Enable droop Enable or inhibit speed control- p1492[0] = r2093.11
ler droop.
12 1 = torque control active Changes over the control mode p1501[0] = r2093.12
0 = speed control active for vector control.
13 1 = no external fault -- p2106[0] = r2093.13
0 = external fault is active (F07860)
14 Not used
15 1 = CDS bit 1 Changes over between settings p0811[0] = r2093.15
for different operation interfac-
es (command data sets).
1) If you switch from telegram 350 to a different one, then the converter sets all interconnections
p1020, … to "0". Exception: p2106 = 1.

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 25
Communication via PROFIBUS and PROFINET
3.1 PROFIDRIVE profile - Cyclic communication

Status word 3 (ZSW3)

Bit Meaning Description Signal intercon-


nection in the
converter
0 1 = DC braking active -- p2051[3] = r0053
1 1 = |n_act | > p1226 Absolute current speed > stationary
state detection
2 1 = |n_act | > p1080 Absolute actual speed > minimum
speed
3 1 = i_act ≧ p2170 Actual current ≥ current threshold
value
4 1 = |n_act | > p2155 Absolute actual speed > speed
threshold value 2
5 1 = |n_act | ≦ p2155 Absolute actual speed < speed
threshold value 2
6 1 = |n_act | ≧ r1119 Speed setpoint reached
7 1 = DC link voltage ≦ p2172 Actual DC link voltage ≦ threshold
value
8 1 = DC link voltage > p2172 Actual DC link voltage > threshold
value
9 1 = ramp-up or ramp-down complet- Ramp-function generator is not
ed active.
10 1 = technology controller output at Technology controller output ≦
the lower limit p2292
11 1 = technology controller output at Technology controller out-
the upper limit put > p2291
12 Not used
13 Not used
14 Not used
15 Not used

Fieldbuses
26 Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG
Communication via PROFIBUS and PROFINET
3.1 PROFIDRIVE profile - Cyclic communication

3.1.2 NAMUR message word

Function description

Fault word according to the VIK-NAMUR definition (MELD_NAMUR)

Bit Significance P No.


0 1 = Control Unit signals a fault p2051[5] = r3113
1 1 = line fault: Phase failure or inadmissible voltage
2 1 = DC link overvoltage
3 1 = Power Module fault, e.g. overcurrent or overtemperature
4 1 = converter overtemperature
5 1 = ground fault/phase fault in the motor cable or in the motor
6 1 = motor overload
7 1 = communication error to the higher-level control system
8 1 = fault in a safety-relevant monitoring channel
10 1 = fault in the internal converter communication
11 1 = line fault
15 1 = other fault

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 27
Communication via PROFIBUS and PROFINET
3.1 PROFIDRIVE profile - Cyclic communication

3.1.3 Control and status word, encoder


Telegrams 3 and 4 allow the higher-level control system to directly access the encoder.
Direct access is necessary, if the higher-level control is responsible for the closed-loop
position control for the drive.
If you enable the "Basic positioner" position control in the converter, then telegrams 3 and 4
cannot be selected, and the converter handles the encoder control.

Control word encoder (G1_STW and G2_STW)

Bit Meaning Explanation Signal interconnec-


tion in the converter
Bit 7 = 0 Bit 7 = 1
0 Function 1 1 = search for refer- 1 = request flying referenc- Telegram 3:
ence cam 1 with a ing to the rising edge of Encoder 1:
positive start direction reference cam 1 p0480[0] = r2050[4]
1 Function 2 1 = search for refer- 1 = request flying referenc-
ence cam 1 with a ing to the falling edge of
negative start direction reference cam 1 Telegram 4:
Encoder 1:
2 Function 3 1 = search for refer- 1 = request flying referenc-
p0480[0] = r2050[4]
ence cam 2 with a ing to the rising edge of
encoder 2:
positive start direction reference cam 2
p0480[1] = p2050[9]
3 Function 4 1 = search for refer- 1 = request flying referenc-
ence cam 2 with a ing to the falling edge of
negative start direction reference cam 2 Telegram 102:
4 Command bit 0 1 = activate the function requested using bit 0 … 3 Encoder 1:
p0480[0] = r2050[5]
5 Command bit 1 1 = read the value requested using bit 0 … 3
6 Command bit 2 Reserved
Telegram 103:
7 Mode 1 = flying referencing
0 = search for reference cams Encoder 1:
p0480[0] = r2050[5]
8 Reserved --- encoder 2:
… p0480[1] =
12 p2050[10]
13 Cyclic absolute 1 = request for the cyclic transfer of the position actu-
value al value in G1_XIST2 or G2_XIST2
14 Parking 1 = request to park the encoder
15 Acknowledge 0 → 1 = acknowledge encoder fault

Fieldbuses
28 Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG
Communication via PROFIBUS and PROFINET
3.1 PROFIDRIVE profile - Cyclic communication

Status word encoder (G1_ZSW and G2_ZSW)

Bit Meaning Explanation Signal interconnec-


tion in the convert-
er
Bit 7 = 0 Bit 7 = 1
0 Function 1 1 = search for refer- 1 = flying referencing to the rising Telegram 3:
ence cam 1 is active edge of reference cam 1 is active Encoder 1:
1 Function 2 1 = search for refer- 1 = flying referencing to the falling p2051[4] = r0481[0]
ence cam 1 is active edge of reference cam 1 is active
2 Function 3 1 = search for refer- 1 = flying referencing to the rising Telegram 4:
ence cam 2 is active edge of reference cam 2 is active
Encoder 1:
3 Function 4 1 = search for refer- 1 = flying referencing to the falling p2051[4] = r0481[0]
ence cam 2 is active edge of reference cam 2 is active encoder 2:
4 Status value 1 1 = position actual 1 = flying referencing to the rising p2051[9] = r0481[1]
value is at reference edge of reference cam 1 has been
cam 1 completed Telegram 102:
5 Status value 2 1 = position actual 1 = flying referencing to the falling Encoder 1:
value is at reference edge of reference cam 1 has been p2051[5] = r0481[0]
cam 1 completed
6 Status value 3 1 = position actual 1 = flying referencing to the rising
value is at reference edge of reference cam 2 has been Telegram 103:
cam 2 completed Encoder 1:
7 Status value 4 1 = position actual 1 = flying referencing to the falling p2051[5] = r0481[0]
value is at reference edge of reference cam 2 has been encoder 2:
cam 2 completed p2051[10] =
r0481[0]
8 Reference 1 = reference cam 1 supplies a high signal
cam 1 0 = reference cam 1 supplies a low signal
9 Reference 1 = reference cam 2 supplies a high signal
cam 2 0 = reference cam 2 supplies a low signal
10 Reserved ---
11 Acknowledge 1 = acknowledge encoder fault is active
12 Reserved ---
13 Cyclic absolute 1 = the position actual value is in G1_XIST2 or G2_XIST2.
value
14 Parking 1 = the encoder is parked
15 Fault 1 = the encoder indicates its actual fault in r0483

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 29
Communication via PROFIBUS and PROFINET
3.1 PROFIDRIVE profile - Cyclic communication

3.1.4 Position actual value of the encoder

G1_XIST1 and G2_XIST1


In the factory setting, the converter transfers the encoder position actual value with a fine
resolution of 11 bits to the higher-level control system.

Figure 3-13 G1_XIST1 and G2_XIST1

The transferred encoder signal has the following properties:


• After the converter power supply has been switched on, the encoder signal = 0.
• The higher-level control must be able to handle a counter overflow of the encoder signal.

G1_XIST2 and G2_XIST2


In G1_XIST2 or G2_XIST2, the converter transfers different values to the higher-level control
system:

Encoder x parked Gx_ZSW.14 = 1


Encoder fault x Gx_ZSW.15 = 1
Referencing encoder x Gx_ZSW.4 = 1 or Gx_ZSW.5 = 1 or Gx_ZSW.6 = 1 or Gx_ZSW.7 = 1

Figure 3-14 G1_XIST2 and G2_XIST2

Fieldbuses
30 Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG
Communication via PROFIBUS and PROFINET
3.1 PROFIDRIVE profile - Cyclic communication

The converter transfers the position values in the same format (encoder pulse number and
fine resolution) the same as G1_XIST1 and G2_XIST1.

Table 3- 1 Fault code

No. Explanation Possible cause


1 Encoder fault One or more encoder faults.
Observe the converter message.
2 Zero-mark monitoring ---
3 Encoder parking canceled Parking was already requested.
4 Search for reference canceled • Encoder has no zero mark (reference mark).
• Reference mark 2, 3 or 4 was requested.
• Switchover to "Flying measurement" was re-
quested during search for reference.
• Command "Read value x" requested during search
for reference mark.
• Inconsistent position measured value with dis-
tance-coded reference marks.
5 Retrieve reference value canceled • More than four values were requested.
• No value requested.
• Requested value is not available.
6 Flying referencing canceled • Reference cam has not been configured
• During "Flying referencing" a changeover was
made to search for reference.
• During "Flying referencing" a request was issued
"Read value x".
7 Retrieve measured value canceled • More than one value was requested.
• No value requested.
• Requested value is not available.
• Encoder is parked.
8 Position actual value transfer canceled • No absolute encoder available.
• Alarm bit in the absolute value protocol set.
3841 Encoder does not support the function ---

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 31
Communication via PROFIBUS and PROFINET
3.1 PROFIDRIVE profile - Cyclic communication

3.1.5 Extend telegrams and change signal interconnection

Overview
When you have selected a telegram, the converter interconnects the corresponding signals
with the fieldbus interface. Generally, these interconnections are locked so that they cannot
be changed. However, with the appropriate setting in the converter, the telegram can be
extended or even freely interconnected.

Function description

Interconnection of send data and receive data

Figure 3-15 Interconnection of the send data

In the converter, the send data are available in the "Word" format (p2051) - and in the
"Double word" format (p2061). If you set a specific telegram, or you change the telegram, the
converter automatically interconnects parameters p2051 and p2061 with the appropriate
signals.

Fieldbuses
32 Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG
Communication via PROFIBUS and PROFINET
3.1 PROFIDRIVE profile - Cyclic communication

Figure 3-16 Interconnection of the receive data

The converter saves the receive data as follows:


• "Word" format in r2050
• "Double word" format in r2060
• Bit-by-bit in r2090 … r2093

Extending a telegram: Procedure


1. Set p0922 = 999.
2. Set parameter p2079 to the value of the corresponding telegram.
3. Interconnect additional send words and receive words with signals of your choice via
parameters r2050 and p2051.
You have extended a telegram.

Freely interconnecting signals in the telegram: Procedure


1. Set p0922 = 999.
2. Set p2079 = 999.
3. Interconnect additional send words and receive words with signals of your choice via
parameters r2050 and p2051.
You have freely interconnected a telegram.

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 33
Communication via PROFIBUS and PROFINET
3.1 PROFIDRIVE profile - Cyclic communication

Example
You wish to extend telegram 1 to 6 send words and 6 receive words. You want to test the
extension by initiating that the converter returns each receive word back to the higher-level
control system.

Procedure
1. p0922 = 999
2. p2079 = 1
3. p2051[2] = r2050[2]
4. …
5. p2051[5] = r2050[5]
6. Test the telegram length for received and sent words:
– r2067[0] = 6
– r2067[1] = 6
You wish to extend telegram 1 to 6 send words and 6 receive words.

Fieldbuses
34 Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG
Communication via PROFIBUS and PROFINET
3.1 PROFIDRIVE profile - Cyclic communication

Parameter

Number Name Factory setting


p0922 PROFIdrive PZD telegram selection 1
r2050[0…11] CO: PROFIdrive PZD receive word -
p2051[0…16] CI: PROFIdrive PZD send word 0 or dependent on
the converter
r2053[0…16] PROFIdrive diagnostics send PZD word -
r2060[0…10] CO: PROFIdrive PZD receive double word -
p2061[0…15] CI: PROFIdrive PZD send double word 0
r2063[0…15] PROFIdrive diagnostics PZD send double word -
r2067 PZD maximum interconnected -
[0] Receive (r2050, r2060)
[1] Send (p2051, p2061)
p2079 PROFIdrive PZD telegram selection extended 1
p2080[0…15] BI: Binector-connector converter, status word 1 [0] 899
[1] 899.1
[2] 899.2
[3] 2139.3
[4] 899.4
[5] 899.5
[6] 899.6
[7] 2139.7
[8] 2197.7
[9] 899.9
[10] 2199.1
[11] 1407.7
[12] 0
[13] 2135.14
[14] 2197.3
[15] 2135.15
r2090.0…15 BO: PROFIdrive receive PZD1 bit by bit -
r2091.0…15 BO: PROFIdrive PZD2 receive bit-serial -
r2092.0…15 BO: PROFIdrive PZD3 receive bit-serial -
r2093.0…15 BO: PROFIdrive PZD4 receive bit-serial -

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 35
Communication via PROFIBUS and PROFINET
3.1 PROFIDRIVE profile - Cyclic communication

Parameter

Parameter Description
p0922 PROFIdrive telegram selection
999: Free telegram (message frame) configuration
p2079 PROFIdrive PZD telegram selection extended
The following values apply if you have still not enabled the "Basic positioner" function
in the converter:
1: Standard telegram 1, PZD-2/2
2: Standard telegram 2, PZD-4/4
3: Standard telegram 3, PZD-5/9
4: Standard telegram 4, PZD-6/14
20: Standard telegram 20, PZD-2/6
350: SIEMENS telegram 350, PZD-4/4
352: SIEMENS telegram 352, PZD-6/6
353: SIEMENS telegram 353, PZD-2/2, PKW-4/4
354: SIEMENS telegram 354, PZD-6/6, PKW-4/4
999: Free telegram configuration
The following values apply if you have enabled the "Basic positioner" function in the
converter:
7: Standard telegram 7, PZD-2/2
9: Standard telegram 9, PZD-10/5
110: SIEMENS telegram 110, PZD-12/7
111: SIEMENS telegram 111, PZD-12/12
999: Free telegram configuration
r2050[0…11] PROFIdrive PZD receive word
Received PZD (setpoints) in the word format
p2051[0…16] PROFIdrive PZD send word
Sent PZD (actual values) in the word format

For further information about receive and send words, refer to the function block diagrams
2468 and 2470 in the List Manual.
Overview of the manuals (Page 244)

Fieldbuses
36 Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG
Communication via PROFIBUS and PROFINET
3.1 PROFIDRIVE profile - Cyclic communication

3.1.6 Data structure of the parameter channel

Overview
The parameter channel allows parameter values to be cyclically read and written to.

Structure of the parameter channel:


• PKE (1st word)
– Type of task (read or write).
– Bit 11 is reserved and is always assigned 0.
– Parameter number
• IND (2nd word)
– Parameter index
• PWE (3rd and 4th word)
– Parameter value

Function description

AK: Request and response ID

Table 3- 2 Request identifiers, control → converter

AK Description Response identifi-


er
positive nega-
tive
0 No request 0 7/8
1 Request parameter value 1/2 7/8
2 Change parameter value (word) 1 7/8
3 Change parameter value (double word) 2 7/8
4 Request descriptive element 1) 3 7/8
6 2) Request parameter value (field) 1) 4/5 7/8
7 2) Change parameter value (field, word) 1) 4 7/8
8 2) Change parameter value (field, double word) 1) 5 7/8
9 Request number of field elements 6 7/8
1) The required element of the parameter is specified in IND (2nd word).
2) The following request IDs are identical: 1 ≡ 6, 2 ≡ 7 and 3 ≡ 8.
We recommend that you use identifiers 6, 7 and 8.

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 37
Communication via PROFIBUS and PROFINET
3.1 PROFIDRIVE profile - Cyclic communication

Table 3- 3 Response identifiers, converter → control

AK Description
0 No response
1 Transfer parameter value (word)
2 Transfer parameter value (double word)
3 Transfer descriptive element 1)
4 Transfer parameter value (field, word) 2)
5 Transfer parameter value (field, double word) 2)
6 Transfer number of field elements
7 Converter cannot process the request.
In the most significant word of the parameter channel, the converter sends an error number
to the control, refer to the following table.
8 No master controller status / no authorization to change parameters of the parameter chan-
nel interface
1) The required element of the parameter is specified in IND (2nd word).
2) The required element of the indexed parameter is specified in IND (2nd word).

Table 3- 4 Error numbers for response identifier 7

No. Description
00 hex Illegal parameter number (access to a parameter that does not exist)
01 hex Parameter value cannot be changed (change request for a parameter value that cannot
be changed)
02 hex Lower or upper value limit exceeded (change request with a value outside the value
limits)
03 hex Incorrect subindex (access to a subindex that does not exist)
04 hex No array (access with a subindex to non-indexed parameters)
05 hex Incorrect data type (change request with a value that does not match the data type of the
parameter)
06 hex Setting not permitted, only resetting (change request with a value not equal to 0 with-
out permission)
07 hex Descriptive element cannot be changed (change request to a descriptive element error
value that cannot be changed)
0B hex No master control (change request but with no master control, see also p0927)
0C hex Keyword missing
11 hex Request cannot be executed due to the operating state (access is not possible for tem-
porary reasons that are not specified)
14 hex Inadmissible value (change request with a value that is within the limits but which is
illegal for other permanent reasons, i.e. a parameter with defined individual values)
65 hex Parameter number is currently deactivated (depending on the mode of the converter)
66 hex Channel width is insufficient (communication channel is too small for response)
68 hex Illegal parameter value (parameter can only assume certain values)
6A hex Request not included / task is not supported (the valid request identifications can be
found in table "Request identifications controller → converter")
6B hex No change access for a controller that is enabled. (The operating state of the converter
prevents a parameter change)

Fieldbuses
38 Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG
Communication via PROFIBUS and PROFINET
3.1 PROFIDRIVE profile - Cyclic communication

No. Description
86 hex Write access only for commissioning (p0010 = 15) (operating state of the converter
prevents a parameter change)
87 hex Know-how protection active, access locked
C8 hex Change request below the currently valid limit (change request to a value that lies with-
in the "absolute" limits, but is however below the currently valid lower limit)
C9 hex Change request above the currently valid limit (example: a parameter value is too large
for the converter power)
CC hex Change request not permitted (change is not permitted as the access code is not availa-
ble)

PNU (parameter number) and page index

Parameter number PNU Page index


0000 … 1999 0000 … 1999 0 hex
2000 … 3999 0000 … 1999 80 hex
6000 … 7999 0000 … 1999 90 hex
8000 … 9999 0000 … 1999 20 hex
10000 … 11999 0000 … 1999 A0 hex
20000 … 21999 0000 … 1999 50 hex
30000 … 31999 0000 … 1999 F0 hex
60000 … 61999 0000 … 1999 74 hex

Subindex
For indexed parameters, the parameter index is located in subindex as hexadecimal value.

PWE: Parameter value or connector


Parameter values or connectors can be located in the PWE.

Table 3- 5 Parameter value or connector

PWE 1 PWE 2
Parameter value Bit 15 … 0 Bit 15 … 8 Bit 7 … 0
0 0 8-bit value
0 16-bit value
32-bit value
Connector Bit 15 … 0 Bit 15 … 10 Bit 9 … 0
Number of the connector 3F hex The index or bit field
number of the con-
nector

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 39
Communication via PROFIBUS and PROFINET
3.1 PROFIDRIVE profile - Cyclic communication

Examples

Read request: Read out serial number of the Power Module (p7841[2])
To obtain the value of indexed parameter p7841, you must fill the parameter channel with
the following data:
• PKE, Bit 12 … 15 (AK): = 6 (request parameter value (field))
• PKE, Bit 0 … 10 (PNU): = 1841 (parameter number without offset)
Parameter number = PNU + offset (page index)
(7841 = 1841 + 6000)
• IND, bit 8 … 15 (subindex): = 2 (index of parameter)
• IND, bit 0 … 7 (page index): = 90 hex (offset 6000 corresponds to 90 hex)
• Because you want to read the parameter value, words 3 and 4 in the parameter channel
for requesting the parameter value are irrelevant. They should be assigned a value of 0,
for example.

Figure 3-17 Parameter channel for read request from p7841[2]

Write request: Change restart mode (p1210)


The restart mode is inhibited in the factory setting (p1210 = 0). In order to activate the
automatic restart with "acknowledge all faults and restart for an ON command", p1210 must
be set to 26:
• PKE, bit 12 … 15 (AK): = 7 (change parameter value (field, word))
• PKE, bit 0 … 10 (PNU): = 4BA hex (1210 = 4BA hex, no offset, as 1210 < 1999)
• IND, bit 8 … 15 (subindex): = 0 hex (parameter is not indexed)
• IND, bit 0 … 7 (page index): = 0 hex (offset 0 corresponds to 0 hex)
• PWE1, bit 0 … 15: = 0 hex
• PWE2, Bit 0 … 15: = 1A hex (26 = 1A hex)

Figure 3-18 A parameter channel to activate the automatic restart with p1210 = 26

Fieldbuses
40 Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG
Communication via PROFIBUS and PROFINET
3.1 PROFIDRIVE profile - Cyclic communication

Write request: Assign digital input 2 with the function ON/OFF1 (p0840[1] = 722.2)
In order to link digital input 2 with ON/OFF1, you must assign parameter p0840[1] (source,
ON/OFF1) the value 722.2 (DI 2). To do this, you must fill the parameter channel as follows:
• PKE, bit 12 … 15 (AK): = 7 hex (change parameter value (field, word))
• PKE, bit 0 … 10 (PNU): = 348 hex (840 = 348 hex, no offset, as 840 < 1999)
• IND, bit 8 … 15 (subindex): = 1 hex (CDS1 = Index 1)
• IND, bit 0 … 7 (page index): = 0 hex (offset 0 corresponds to 0 hex)
• PWE1, Bit 0 … 15: = 2D2 hex (722 = 2D2 hex)
• PWE2, Bit 10 … 15: = 3F hex (drive object - for SINAMICS G120, always 63 = 3f hex)
• PWE2, Bit 0 … 9: = 2 hex (Index of Parameter (DI 2 = 2))

Figure 3-19 Parameter channel to assign digital input 2 with ON/OFF1

Function description

AK: Request and response ID

Table 3- 6 Request identifiers, control → converter

AK Description Response identifi-


er
positive nega-
tive
0 No request 0 7/8
1 Request parameter value 1/2 7/8
2 Change parameter value (word) 1 7/8
3 Change parameter value (double word) 2 7/8
4 Request descriptive element 1) 3 7/8
6 2) Request parameter value (field) 1) 4/5 7/8
7 2) Change parameter value (field, word) 1) 4 7/8
8 2) Change parameter value (field, double word) 1) 5 7/8
9 Request number of field elements 6 7/8
1) The required element of the parameter is specified in IND (2nd word).
2) The following request IDs are identical: 1 ≡ 6, 2 ≡ 7 and 3 ≡ 8.
We recommend that you use identifiers 6, 7 and 8.

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 41
Communication via PROFIBUS and PROFINET
3.1 PROFIDRIVE profile - Cyclic communication

Table 3- 7 Response identifiers, converter → control

AK Description
0 No response
1 Transfer parameter value (word)
2 Transfer parameter value (double word)
3 Transfer descriptive element 1)
4 Transfer parameter value (field, word) 2)
5 Transfer parameter value (field, double word) 2)
6 Transfer number of field elements
7 Converter cannot process the request.
In the most significant word of the parameter channel, the converter sends an error number
to the control, refer to the following table.
8 No master controller status / no authorization to change parameters of the parameter chan-
nel interface
1) The required element of the parameter is specified in IND (2nd word).
2) The required element of the indexed parameter is specified in IND (2nd word).

Table 3- 8 Error numbers for response identifier 7

No. Description
00 hex Illegal parameter number (access to a parameter that does not exist)
01 hex Parameter value cannot be changed (change request for a parameter value that cannot
be changed)
02 hex Lower or upper value limit exceeded (change request with a value outside the value
limits)
03 hex Incorrect subindex (access to a subindex that does not exist)
04 hex No array (access with a subindex to non-indexed parameters)
05 hex Incorrect data type (change request with a value that does not match the data type of the
parameter)
06 hex Setting not permitted, only resetting (change request with a value not equal to 0 with-
out permission)
07 hex Descriptive element cannot be changed (change request to a descriptive element error
value that cannot be changed)
0B hex No master control (change request but with no master control, see also p0927.)
0C hex Keyword missing
11 hex Request cannot be executed due to the operating state (access is not possible for tem-
porary reasons that are not specified)
14 hex Inadmissible value (change request with a value that is within the limits but which is
illegal for other permanent reasons, i.e. a parameter with defined individual values)
65 hex Parameter number is currently deactivated (depending on the mode of the converter)
66 hex Channel width is insufficient (communication channel is too small for response)
68 hex Illegal parameter value (parameter can only assume certain values)
6A hex Request not included / task is not supported (the valid request identifications can be
found in table "Request identifications controller → converter")
6B hex No change access for a controller that is enabled. (The operating state of the conerter
prevents a parameter change)
86 hex Write access only for commissioning (p0010 = 15) (operating state of the converter
prevents a parameter change)

Fieldbuses
42 Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG
Communication via PROFIBUS and PROFINET
3.1 PROFIDRIVE profile - Cyclic communication

No. Description
87 hex Know-how protection active, access locked
C8 hex Change request below the currently valid limit (change request to a value that lies with-
in the "absolute" limits, but is however below the currently valid lower limit)
C9 hex Change request above the currently valid limit (example: a parameter value is too large
for the converter power)
CC hex Change request not permitted (change is not permitted as the access code is not availa-
ble)

PNU (parameter number) and page index

Parameter number PNU Page index


0000 … 1999 0000 … 1999 0 hex
2000 … 3999 0000 … 1999 80 hex
6000 … 7999 0000 … 1999 90 hex
8000 … 9999 0000 … 1999 20 hex
10000 … 11999 0000 … 1999 A0 hex
20000 … 21999 0000 … 1999 50 hex
29000 … 29999 0000 … 1999 70 hex
30000 … 31999 0000 … 1999 F0 hex
60000 … 61999 0000 … 1999 74 hex

Subindex
For indexed parameters, the parameter index is located in subindex as hexadecimal value.

PWE: Parameter value or connector


Parameter values or connectors can be located in the PWE.

Table 3- 9 Parameter value or connector

PWE 1 PWE 2
Parameter value Bit 15 … 0 Bit 15 … 8 Bit 7 … 0
0 0 8-bit value
0 16-bit value
32-bit value
Connector Bit 15 … 0 Bit 15 … 10 Bit 9 … 0
Number of the connector 3F hex The index or bit field
number of the con-
nector

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 43
Communication via PROFIBUS and PROFINET
3.1 PROFIDRIVE profile - Cyclic communication

Examples

Read request: Read out serial number of the Power Module (p7841[2])
To obtain the value of the indexed parameter p7841, you must fill the telegram of the
parameter channel with the following data:
• PKE, Bit 12 … 15 (AK): = 6 (request parameter value (field))
• PKE, Bit 0 … 10 (PNU): = 1841 (parameter number without offset)
Parameter number = PNU + offset (page index)
(7841 = 1841 + 6000)
• IND, bit 8 … 15 (subindex): = 2 (index of parameter)
• IND, bit 0 … 7 (page index): = 90 hex (offset 6000 corresponds to 90 hex)
• Because you want to read the parameter value, words 3 and 4 in the parameter channel
for requesting the parameter value are irrelevant. They should be assigned a value of 0,
for example.

Figure 3-20 Telegram for a read request from p7841[2]

PNU (parameter number) and page index

Parameter number PNU Page index


0000 … 1999 0000 … 1999 0 hex
2000 … 3999 0000 … 1999 80 hex
6000 … 7999 0000 … 1999 90 hex
8000 … 9999 0000 … 1999 20 hex
10000 … 11999 0000 … 1999 A0 hex
20000 … 21999 0000 … 1999 50 hex
30000 … 31999 0000 … 1999 F0 hex
60000 … 61999 0000 … 1999 74 hex

Subindex
For indexed parameters, the parameter index is located in subindex as hexadecimal value.

Fieldbuses
44 Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG
Communication via PROFIBUS and PROFINET
3.1 PROFIDRIVE profile - Cyclic communication

PWE: Parameter value or connector


Parameter values or connectors can be located in the PWE.

Table 3- 10 Parameter value or connector

PWE 1 PWE 2
Parameter value Bit 15 … 0 Bit 15 … 8 Bit 7 … 0
0 0 8-bit value
0 16-bit value
32-bit value
Connector Bit 15 … 0 Bit 15 … 10 Bit 9 … 0
Number of the connector 3F hex The index or bit field
number of the con-
nector

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 45
Communication via PROFIBUS and PROFINET
3.1 PROFIDRIVE profile - Cyclic communication

3.1.6.1 Application examples

Read request: Read out serial number of the Power Module (p7841[2])
To obtain the value of the indexed parameter p7841, you must fill the telegram of the
parameter channel with the following data:
• PKE, Bit 12 … 15 (AK): = 6 (request parameter value (field))
• PKE, Bit 0 … 10 (PNU): = 1841 (parameter number without offset)
Parameter number = PNU + offset (page index)
(7841 = 1841 + 6000)
• IND, bit 8 … 15 (subindex): = 2 (index of parameter)
• IND, bit 0 … 7 (page index): = 90 hex (offset 6000 corresponds to 90 hex)
• Because you want to read the parameter value, words 3 and 4 in the parameter channel
for requesting the parameter value are irrelevant. They should be assigned a value of 0,
for example.

Figure 3-21 Telegram for a read request from p7841[2]

Write request: Change restart mode (p1210)


The restart mode is inhibited in the factory setting (p1210 = 0). In order to activate the
automatic restart with "acknowledge all faults and restart for an ON command", p1210 must
be set to 26:
• PKE, bit 12 … 15 (AK): = 7 (change parameter value (field, word))
• PKE, bit 0 … 10 (PNU): = 4BA hex (1210 = 4BA hex, no offset, as 1210 < 1999)
• IND, bit 8 … 15 (subindex): = 0 hex (parameter is not indexed)
• IND, bit 0 … 7 (page index): = 0 hex (offset 0 corresponds to 0 hex)
• PWE1, bit 0 … 15: = 0 hex
• PWE2, Bit 0 … 15: = 1A hex (26 = 1A hex)

Figure 3-22 Telegram, to activate the automatic restart with p1210 = 26

Fieldbuses
46 Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG
Communication via PROFIBUS and PROFINET
3.1 PROFIDRIVE profile - Cyclic communication

Write request: Assign digital input 2 with the function ON/OFF1 (p0840[1] = 722.2)
In order to link digital input 2 with ON/OFF1, you must assign parameter p0840[1] (source,
ON/OFF1) the value 722.2 (DI 2). To do this, you must populate the telegram of the
parameter channel as follows:
• PKE, bit 12 … 15 (AK): = 7 hex (change parameter value (field, word))
• PKE, bit 0 … 10 (PNU): = 348 hex (840 = 348 hex, no offset, as 840 < 1999)
• IND, bit 8 … 15 (subindex): = 1 hex (CDS1 = Index 1)
• IND, bit 0 … 7 (page index): = 0 hex (offset 0 corresponds to 0 hex)
• PWE1, Bit 0 … 15: = 2D2 hex (722 = 2D2 hex)
• PWE2, Bit 10 … 15: = 3F hex (drive object - for SINAMICS G120, always 63 = 3f hex)
• PWE2, Bit 0 … 9: = 2 hex (Index of Parameter (DI 2 = 2))

Figure 3-23 Telegram, to assign DI 2 with ON/OFF1

Example

Application example, "Read and write to parameters"


Further information is provided on the Internet:
Reading and writing parameters cyclically via PROFIBUS
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/29157692)

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 47
Communication via PROFIBUS and PROFINET
3.1 PROFIDRIVE profile - Cyclic communication

3.1.7 Slave-to-slave communication


"Direct data exchange" is sometimes called "slave-to-slave communication" or "data exchange
broadcast". Here, slaves exchange data without any direct involvement of the master.
Example: A converter uses the actual speed value of another converter as its speed setpoint.

Definitions
• Publisher: Slave, which sends data for direct data exchange.
• Subscriber: Slave, which receives the data for direct data exchange from the publisher.
• Links and access points define the data that is used for direct data exchange.

Restrictions
• Direct data exchange in the current firmware version is only possible for converters with
PROFIBUS communication.
• A maximum of 12 PZDs are permissible for each drive.
• A maximum of four links are possible from one subscriber to one or several publishers.

Configuring slave-to-slave communication

Procedure
1. In the control, define:
– Which converters operate as publisher (sender) or subscriber (receiver)?
– Which data or data areas do you use for direct data exchange?
2. In the converter, define:
How does the subscriber process the data transferred using direct data exchange?
You have now configured slave-to-slave communication.

Fieldbuses
48 Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG
Communication via PROFIBUS and PROFINET
3.2 PROFIDRIVE profile - Acyclic communication

3.2 PROFIDRIVE profile - Acyclic communication


The converter supports the following types of acyclic communication:
• For PROFIBUS:
acyclic communication via data set 47
• For PROFINET:
acyclic communication via B02E hex and B02F hex
The maximum data length per request is 240 bytes.

Note
Values in italics
Values in italics in the following tables mean that you have to adjust these values for a
specific request.

Reading parameter values

Table 3- 11 Request to read parameters

Data block Byte n Bytes n + 1 n


Header Reference 01 hex ... FF hex 01 hex: Read job 0
01 hex (ID of drive objects, at G120 al- Number of parameters (m) 2
ways = 1)
Address, parameter 1 Attribute Number of the indices 4
10 hex: Parameter value 00 hex ... EA hex
20 hex: Parameter description (For parameters without index: 00 hex)
Parameter number 0001 hex ... FFFE hex 6
Number of the 1st index 0000 hex ... FFFE hex 8
(for parameters without index: 0000 hex)
… …
Address, parameter 2 … …
… … …
Address, parame- … …
ter m

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 49
Communication via PROFIBUS and PROFINET
3.2 PROFIDRIVE profile - Acyclic communication

Table 3- 12 Converter response to a read request

Data block Byte n Bytes n + 1 n


Header Reference (identical to a read request) 01 hex: Converter has executed the read 0
request.
81 hex: Converter was not able to completely
execute the read request.
01 hex (ID of drive objects, at G120 al- Number of parameters (m) 2
ways = 1) (identical to the read request)
Values, parameter 1 Format Number of index values or - for a negative 4
02 hex: Integer8 response - number of error values
03 hex: Integer16
04 hex: Integer32
05 hex: Unsigned8
06 hex: Unsigned16
07 hex: Unsigned32
08 hex: FloatingPoint
0A hex: OctetString
0D hex: TimeDifference
34 hex: TimeOfDay without date indication
35 hex: TimeDifference with date indication
36 hex: TimeDifference without date indica-
tion
41 hex: Byte
42 hex: Word
43 hex: Double word
44 hex: Error
Value of the 1st index or - for a negative response - error value 1 6
You can find the error values in a table at the end of this section.
… …
Values, parameter 2 …
… …
Values, parameter m …

Fieldbuses
50 Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG
Communication via PROFIBUS and PROFINET
3.2 PROFIDRIVE profile - Acyclic communication

Changing parameter values

Table 3- 13 Request to change parameters

Data block Byte n Bytes n + 1 n


Header Reference 01 hex ... FF hex 02 hex: Change request 0
01 hex (ID of drive objects, at G120 al- Number of parameters (m) 01 hex ... 2
ways = 1) 27 hex
Address, parameter 1 10 hex: Parameter value Number of indices 4
00 hex ... EA hex
(00 hex and 01 hex are equivalents)
Parameter number 0001 hex ... FFFF hex 6
Number of the 1st index 0000 hex ... FFFE hex 8
… …
Address, parameter 2 …
… … …
Address, parame- …
ter m
Values, parameter 1 Format Number of index values
02 hex: Integer 8 00 hex ... EA hex
03 hex: Integer 16
04 hex: Integer 32
05 hex: Unsigned 8
06 hex: Unsigned 16
07 hex: Unsigned 32
08 hex: Floating Point
0A hex: Octet String
0D hex: Time Difference
34 hex: TimeOfDay without date indication
35 hex: TimeDifference with date indication
36 hex: TimeDifference without date indica-
tion
41 hex: Byte
42 hex: Word
43 hex: Double word
Value of the 1st index

Values, parameter 2 …
… …
Values, parameter m …

Table 3- 14 Response, if the converter has executed the change request

Data block Byte n Bytes n + 1 n


Header Reference (identical to a change request) 02 hex (change request successful) 0
01 hex (ID of drive objects, at G120 al- Number of parameters (identical to a 2
ways = 1) change request)

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 51
Communication via PROFIBUS and PROFINET
3.2 PROFIDRIVE profile - Acyclic communication

Table 3- 15 Response if the converter was not able to completely execute the change request

Data block Byte n Bytes n + 1 n


Header Reference (identical to a change request) 82 hex: (Converter was not able to complete- 0
ly execute the write request)
01 hex (ID of drive objects, at G120 al- Number of parameters (identical to a 2
ways = 1) change request)
Values, parameter 1 Format Number of error values 4
40 hex: Zero (change request for this data 00 hex
block executed)
44 hex: Error (change request for this data 01 hex or 02 hex
block not executed)
Only for "Error" - error value 1 6
You can find the error values in the table at the end of this section.
Only for "Error" - error value 2 8
Error value 2 is either zero, or it contains the number of the first index where the error oc-
curred.
Values, parameter 2 ...
... … …
Values, parameter m ...

Error values

Table 3- 16 Error value in the parameter response

Error Significance
value 1
00 hex Illegal parameter number (access to a parameter that does not exist)
01 hex Parameter value cannot be changed (change request for a parameter value that cannot be changed)
02 hex Lower or upper value limit exceeded (change request with a value outside the value limits)
03 hex Incorrect subindex (access to a parameter index that does not exist)
04 hex No array (access with a subindex to non-indexed parameters)
05 hex Incorrect data type (change request with a value that does not match the data type of the parameter)
06 hex Setting not permitted, only resetting (change request with a value not equal to 0 without permission)
07 hex Descriptive element cannot be changed (change request to a descriptive element that cannot be changed)
09 hex Description data not available (access to a description that does not exist, parameter value is available)
0B hex No master control (change request but with no master control)
0F hex Text array does not exist (although the parameter value is available, the request is made to a text array that
does not exist)
11 hex Request cannot be executed due to the operating state (access is not possible for temporary reasons that are
not specified)
14 hex Inadmissible value (change request with a value that is within the limits but which is illegal for other perma-
nent reasons, i.e. a parameter with defined individual values)
15 hex Response too long (the length of the actual response exceeds the maximum transfer length)
16 hex Illegal parameter address (illegal or unsupported value for attribute, number of elements, parameter number,
subindex or a combination of these)
17 hex Illegal format (change request for an illegal or unsupported format)
18 hex Number of values not consistent (number of values of the parameter data to not match the number of ele-
ments in the parameter address)
19 hex Drive object does not exist (access to a drive object that does not exist)

Fieldbuses
52 Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG
Communication via PROFIBUS and PROFINET
3.2 PROFIDRIVE profile - Acyclic communication

Error Significance
value 1
20 hex Parameter text cannot be changed
21 hex Service is not supported (illegal or not support request ID).
6B hex A change request for a controller that has been enabled is not possible. (The converter rejects the change
request because the motor is switched on. Observe the "Can be changed" parameter attribute (C1, C2, U, T) in
the parameter list.
Manuals and technical support (Page 244)
6C hex Unknown unit.
6E hex Change request is only possible when the motor is being commissioned (p0010 = 3).
6F hex Change request is only possible when the power unit is being commissioned (p0010 = 2).
70 hex Change request is only possible for quick commissioning (basic commissioning) (p0010 = 1).
71 hex Change request is only possible if the converter is ready (p0010 = 0).
72 hex Change request is only possible for a parameter reset (restore to factory setting) (p0010 = 30).
73 hex Change request possible only during commissioning of the safety functions (p0010 = 95).
74 hex Change request is only possible when a technological application/unit is being commissioned (p0010 = 5).
75 hex Change request is only possible in a commissioning state (p0010 ≠ 0).
76 hex Change request is not possible for internal reasons (p0010 = 29).
77 hex Change request is not possible during download.
81 hex Change request is not possible during download.
82 hex Accepting the master control is inhibited via BI: p0806.
83 hex Desired interconnection is not possible (the connector output does not supply a float value although the con-
nector input requires a float value)
84 hex Converter does not accept a change request (converter is busy with internal calculations. See parameter
r3996 in the parameter list.
Manuals and technical support (Page 244)
85 hex No access methods defined.
86 hex Write access only during commissioning of the data records (p0010 = 15) (operating status of the converter
prevents a parameter change.)
87 hex Know-how protection active, access locked
C8 hex Change request below the currently valid limit (change request to a value that lies within the "absolute" lim-
its, but is however below the currently valid lower limit)
C9 hex Change request above the currently valid limit (example: a parameter value is too large for the converter
power)
CC hex Change request not permitted (change is not permitted as the access code is not available)

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 53
Communication via PROFIBUS and PROFINET
3.3 PROFIdrive profile - Diagnostic channels

3.3 PROFIdrive profile - Diagnostic channels


The converters provide the diagnostics standardized for PROFIBUS and PROFINET. This means
that it is possible to directly output faults and alarms at an HMI (control system screen).
Here, PROFINET offers more functions than PROFIBUS
• PROFIBUS: Faults without component assignment
• PROFINET: Faults and alarms with component assignment
The fault and alarm messages are saved in the converter in the following parameters
• r0947[0 … 63]: Fault number
• r2122[0 … 63]: Alarm code
• r3120[0 … 63]: Components which are involved with the fault (only for PROFINET)
• r3121[0 … 63]: Components which are involved with the alarm (only for PROFINET)
The converter transfers the messages in the sequence in which they occurred
The control generates the time stamp when the messages are received

Fieldbuses
54 Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG
Communication via PROFIBUS and PROFINET
3.3 PROFIdrive profile - Diagnostic channels

3.3.1 Diagnostics with PROFINET


PROFINET uses the channel diagnostics to transfer PROFIdrive message classes.

9000 hex Hardware/software error 900A hex Position/speed actual value incorrect or not
available
9001 hex Network fault 900B hex Internal (DRIVE-CLiQ) communication error
9002 hex Supply voltage fault 900C hex Infeed faulted
9003 hex DC link overvoltage 900D hex Braking module faulted
9004 hex Power electronics faulted 900E hex Line filter faulted
9005 hex Overtemperature of the electronic components 900F hex External measured value / signal state outside
the permissible range
9006 hex Ground fault / inter-phase short circuit 9010 hex Application / technological function faulted
9007 hex Motor overload 9011 hex Error in the parameterization / configuration
/commissioning procedure
9008 hex Communication error to the higher-level control 9012 hex General drive fault
system
9009 hex Safety monitoring channel has identified an 9013 hex Auxiliary unit faulted
error
Figure 3-24 Structure of the channel diagnostics

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 55
Communication via PROFIBUS and PROFINET
3.3 PROFIdrive profile - Diagnostic channels

Reading out diagnostics data


The control requests the diagnostics data from the converter using "Read data set", e.g. using
a read record with index 800C hex.
The following rules apply:
• 1 Message block (=ChannelDiagnosisData)
if (one or several) faults of the same message class are detected at the converter
• n message blocks
if at the converter, n faults of different message classes are detected
Further information is provided in the Internet: To access this link, you must be a member of
PROFIBUS and PROFINET International (PI).
PROFINET IO specification (http://www.profibus.com/nc/download/specifications-
standards/downloads/profinet-io-specification/display/)

Fieldbuses
56 Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG
Communication via PROFIBUS and PROFINET
3.3 PROFIdrive profile - Diagnostic channels

3.3.2 Diagnostics with PROFIBUS


The following objects belonging to a diagnostics message in PROFIBUS
• Standard diagnostics
– Sequence: Always at the first position of the message
– Length is always 6 bytes
• Identifier-related diagnostics
– Sequence: At the second, third or fourth position
– Identification using the header,
– For SINAMICS G120, the length is always 2 bytes
• Status messages/module status
– Sequence: At the second, third or fourth position
– Identification using the header
– Length for SINAMICS G120:
- 5 bytes for configuration using GSD
- 6 bytes when configuring using the object library
• Channel-related diagnostics
– Sequence: At the second, third or fourth position
– Identification using the header
– Length is always 3 bytes
• Diagnostics alarm with DS0 / DS1
– Sequence: Always at the last position of the message
– Slot-specific The current state of the slot responsible for the message is transferred.

Note
Precondition for diagnostics via PROFIBUS
The master must operate in the DPV1 mode for diagnostics via PROFIBUS.

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 57
Communication via PROFIBUS and PROFINET
3.3 PROFIdrive profile - Diagnostic channels

Standard diagnostics

The following values are decisive for the diagnostics:


• Ext_Diag: Group signal for diagnostics in the slave:
- 0: No fault is active
- 1: At least one alarm or fault is active
• Ext_Diag_Overflow:
Display for the diagnostics overflow in the slave (for more than 240 bytes)

Identifier-related diagnostics

The identifier-related diagnostics provides a bit (KB_n) for each slot allocated when configuring the
device. If a diagnostics message is active at a slot, then its KB_n = 1.
For G120 only one slot is allocated:
• KB_0 when configuring with the GSD
• KB_3 when configuring with the object manager

Fieldbuses
58 Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG
Communication via PROFIBUS and PROFINET
3.3 PROFIdrive profile - Diagnostic channels

Status messages, module status

For G120, independent of the status, for all slots “00” is always output, i.e. valid user data.

Channel-related diagnostics

2 Undervoltage 22 Motor overload


3 Overvoltage 23 Commun. with controller faulted
9 Error 24 Safety monit. Detected an error
16 Hardware/software error 25 Act. Position/speed value error
17 Line supply/filter faulted 26 Internal communication faulted
18 DC link overvoltage 27 Infeed faulted
19 Power electronics faulted 28 Braking controller faulted
20 Electronic component overtemp. 29 External signal state error
21 Ground/phase fault detected 30 Application/function faulted
When multiple faults are allocated at one converter with the same message class, then only one mes-
sage is displayed.

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 59
Communication via PROFIBUS and PROFINET
3.3 PROFIdrive profile - Diagnostic channels

Diagnostics alarm with DS0 / DS1

1) Alarm specifier 4) Module fault


1: Fault is active and the slot is not OK 0: No fault is active
2: Fault is resolved and the slot is OK 1: Fault is active
3: Fault is resolved and the slot is not OK
2) Channel fault present 5) Channel information present
0: No fault is active 1: DS1 exists
1: Fault is active
3) Internal fault 6) Type of class module = 0011 (dis-
0: No fault is active tributed)
1: Fault is active

A table with the message classes is provided in the List Manual of the converter.
Overview of the manuals (Page 244)

Fieldbuses
60 Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG
Communication via PROFIBUS and PROFINET
3.4 Identification & maintenance data (I&M)

3.4 Identification & maintenance data (I&M)

I&M data
The converter supports the following identification and maintenance (I&M) data.

I&M Format Explanation Associated param- Example for the


data eters content
I&M0 u8[64] PROFIBUS Converter-specific data, read only - See below
u8[54] PROFINET
I&M1 Visible String [32] Plant/system identifier p8806[0 … 31] "ak12-ne.bo2=fu1"
Visible String [22] Location code p8806[32 … 53] "sc2+or45"
I&M2 Visible String [16] Date p8807[0 … 15] "2013-01-21 16:15"
I&M3 Visible String [54] Any comment p8808[0 … 53] -
I&M4 Octet String[54] Check signature to track changes for p8809[0 … 53] Values of r9781[0]
Safety Integrated. and r9782[0]
This value can be changed by the user.
The test signature is reset to the value
generated by the machine if p8805 = 0
is used.

When requested, the converter transfers its I&M data to a higher-level control or to a PC/PG
with installed STEP 7 or TIA Portal.

I&M0

Designation Format Example for the con- Valid for Valid for
tent PROFINET PROFIBUS
Manufacturer-specific u8[10] 00 … 00 hex --- ✓
MANUFACTURER_ID u16 42d hex (=Siemens) ✓ ✓
ORDER_ID Visible String [20] "6SL3246-0BA22-1FA0" ✓ ✓
SERIAL_NUMBER Visible String [16] "T-R32015957" ✓ ✓
HARDWARE_REVISION u16 0001 hex ✓ ✓
SOFTWARE_REVISION char, u8[3] "V" 04.70.19 ✓ ✓
REVISION_COUNTER u16 0000 hex ✓ ✓
PROFILE_ID u16 3A00 hex ✓ ✓
PROFILE_SPECIFIC_TYPE u16 0000 hex ✓ ✓
IM_VERSION u8[2] 01.02 ✓ ✓
IM_SUPPORTED bit[16] 001E hex ✓ ✓

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 61
Communication via PROFIBUS and PROFINET
3.5 S7 communication

3.5 S7 communication
Communication via the S7 protocol facilitates the following:
• Access to the converter with Startdrive.
• Remote maintenance of the converter with Startdrive across network boundaries.
Remote maintenance across network boundaries
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/97550333)
• Control of the converter directly via SIMATIC Panels via PROFIBUS or PROFINET without
higher-level control.
Directly accessing a SINAMICS G120 converter from a SIMATIC panel (Page 62)

Note
Number of S7 protocol connections
The converter supports four S7 protocol connections. Two of these are required for
Startdrive. Each of the remaining two are available for access to the converter via SIMATIC
Panels.

3.5.1 Directly accessing a SINAMICS G120 converter from a SIMATIC panel

Example of direct access to the converter via a SIMATIC panel


You want to use the SIMATIC panel to do the following:
• Switch the converter on and off
• Enter a setpoint
• Display the actual value and status

Requirements
You have installed the following software packages on your computer and made the
following settings:
• WINCCflex 2008 SP1 or higher
• Startdrive
• You have now configured the converter in Startdrive.
• Converter and panel are connected with one another via PROFIBUS or PROFINET.
• The same baud rates are set in the converter and in the panel.
• The bus address configured in WinCC flexible matches the bus address of the converter.

Fieldbuses
62 Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG
Communication via PROFIBUS and PROFINET
3.5 S7 communication

Adjusting settings in the converter


Procedure
1. Make the following settings and enables so that the converter can accept commands
from the panel:
– Set the two signal sources for OFF2 (p0844 and p0845) to 1:
p0844 = 1
p0845 = 1
– Set the two signal sources for OFF3 (p0848 and p0849) to 1:
p0848 = 1
p0849 = 1
– Set the enables for the ramp-function generator:
p1140 = 1
p1141 = 1
– Set the setpoint enable:
p1142 = 1
2. Adjust the parameters for the ON/OFF1 command from the SIMATIC panel
– Set p0840[0] = 2094.0
In doing so, you connect up the ON/OFF1 command using the Bit 0 of the BICO
transformer 2094. The signal source for this parameter is p2099.
– Set p2099[0] = p2900.
In doing so, you give the ON/OFF1 command by setting P2900 = 1 (ON) or 0 (OFF1)
3. Set parameters for the setpoint default
– Set:
p1070 = 1001 (fixed setpoint 1 as setpoint)
p1016 = 1 (direct selection of the speed setpoint)
p1020 = 1 (fixed speed setpoint selection, bit 0)
4. Actual value and status word
No further settings are required on the converter side for displaying the actual speed value
(r0021) and the status word (r0052).
You have now made the settings in the converter.

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 63
Communication via PROFIBUS and PROFINET
3.5 S7 communication

Settings at the SIMATIC panel


Procedure
1. Configure the connection using WinCC flexible
– Enter a name for the connection
– Set the value in the "Active" column to "On".
– Select "SIMATIC S7 300/400" as the communication driver.
– Set the value in the "Online" column to "On".
2. Make the following settings for the configured connection:
– Select the interface (IF1 B for PROFIBUS, "Ethernet" for PROFINET).
– Set the baud rate for PROFIBUS.
– Assign a bus address (PROFIBUS) or an IP address (PROFINET).
– Select S7ONLINE as the access point.
– If no other control is connected to the converter, select "Only master on bus".
– Select cyclical operation.
3. ON/OFF1:
– Create a variable for the parameter p2900, which refers to the address "Data block
2900 with the data word DBD 0 (data type double word)":
DB2900.DBD 0
You can switch ON/OFF1 on the panel using one or two buttons.
4. Setpoint
– Create a variable for the parameter 1001, which refers to the address "Data block 1001
with the data word DBD 0 (data type real)":
DB1001.DBD 0
You can display it through an I/O field.
5. Actual value display
– Create a variable for the parameter r0021, which refers to the address "Data block 21
with the data word DBD 0 (data type real)":
DB21.DBD 0
You can display it through an I/O field.
6. Status display
– Create a variable for the parameter r0052, which refers to the address "Data block 52
with the data word DBW 0 (data type word)":
DB52.DBW 0
You can display it through an I/O field with a binary display, for example.
You have now made the most important settings in the SIMATIC panel.

Fieldbuses
64 Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG
Communication via PROFIBUS and PROFINET
3.5 S7 communication

General information for accessing converter parameters


You must create a variable with the following structure for each parameter that you want to
display or change using the SIMATIC panel: DBX DBY Z
• X: Data block number ≙ Parameter number
• Y: Data type (can be found in the parameter list)
• Z: Data block offset ≙ Parameter index

Figure 3-25 Accessing converter parameters using a SINAMICS G120 as an example

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 65
Communication via PROFIBUS and PROFINET
3.6 Communication via PROFINET

3.6 Communication via PROFINET


You can either integrate the converter in a PROFINET network or communicate with the
converter via Ethernet.

The converter in PROFINET IO operation

Figure 3-26 The converter in PROFINET IO operation (examples)

The converter supports the following functions:


• RT
• IRT: The converter forwards the clock synchronism, but does not support clock
synchronism.
• MRP: Media redundancy, impulsed with 200 ms. Precondition: Ring topology
With MRP, you get an uninterrupted switchover if you set the failure monitoring time to a
value > 200 ms.
• MRPD: Media redundancy, bumpless. Precondition: IRT and the ring topology created in
the control
• Diagnostic alarms in accordance with the error classes specified in the PROFIdrive profile.
• Device replacement without removable data storage medium: The replacement converter
is assigned the device name from the IO controller, not from its memory card or from the
programming device.
• Shared Device for converters that support PROFIsafe.

The converter as Ethernet node

Figure 3-27 The converter as Ethernet node (examples)

Fieldbuses
66 Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG
Communication via PROFIBUS and PROFINET
3.6 Communication via PROFINET

Further information on PROFINET


Further information on PROFINET can be found on the Internet:
• PROFINET – the Ethernet standard for automation
(http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/automation/en/industrial-
communications/profinet/Pages/Default.aspx)
• PROFINET system description
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/19292127)

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 67
Communication via PROFIBUS and PROFINET
3.6 Communication via PROFINET

3.6.1 Converter with PROFINET interface


The pin assignment and the connectors that you require for your converter are listed in the
following tables.
You can implement either a ring or line-type topology using the two sockets at the converter.
You only require one of the two sockets at the beginning and end of a line.
You can use switches to realize other topologies.

Table 3- 17 Assignment table

Converter/Control Unit Connection via


X150 P1/ X03/X04 X03/X04
X150 P2 (RJ45) (M12)
(RJ45)

G120
• CU230P-2 PN x

• CU240E-2 PN x

• CU240E-2 PN-F x

• CU250S-2 PN x

G120C
• G120C PN x

G120D
• CU240D-2 PN x

• CU240D-2 PN-F x

• CU250D-2 PN-F x

• CU240D-2 PN-F [PP] x

• CU250D-2 PN-F [PP] x

G110M
• CU240M PN x

Fieldbuses
68 Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG
Communication via PROFIBUS and PROFINET
3.6 Communication via PROFINET

G115D
• G115D PN x
(X150 P1/P2)

Table 3- 18 Connector pin assignments

Signal X150 P1/ X03/X04 X03/X04, X150


X150 P2 (RJ45) P1/P2
(RJ45) (M12)

TX- Transmit data - 1 1 1


RX+, Receive data + 3 2 2
TX+ Transmit data + 2 3 3
RX- Receive data - 6 6 4
--- 4 4 ---
--- 5 5 ---
--- 7 7 ---
--- 8 8 ---

Recommended connector
RJ45, IP20: 6GK1901-1BB10-2Ax0
Information for assembling the SIMATIC NET Industrial Ethernet FastConnect RF45 plug 180
can be found on the Internet:
Assembly instructions for the SIMATIC NET Industrial Ethernet FastConnect RJ45 plug
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/37217116/133300)

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 69
Communication via PROFIBUS and PROFINET
3.6 Communication via PROFINET

3.6.2 Integrating converters into PROFINET

Note
PROFINET interface X150
The network with which interface X150 is connected must be separated from the rest of the
plant network in accordance with the Defense in Depth concept. Manual access to cables and
any open connections must be protected as in a control cabinet.

To connect the converter to a control system via PROFINET, proceed as follows:

Procedure
1. Integrate the converter in the bus system (e.g. ring topology) of the control using PROFINET
cables and the two PROFINET sockets X150-P1 and X150-P2 or X03 and X04.
The position of the sockets is given in the operating instructions for the converter.
Pin assignment: Converter with PROFINET interface (Page 68).
The maximum permitted cable length from the previous station and to the subsequent
one is 100 m.
2. Externally supply the converter with 24 V DC through terminals 31 and 32 or via X01
(X01/X02 with G115D).
The external 24 V supply is only required if communications with the control system
should also operate when the line voltage is switched off.
You have connected the converter to the control using PROFINET.

Fieldbuses
70 Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG
Communication via PROFIBUS and PROFINET
3.6 Communication via PROFINET

3.6.3 PROFINET IO operation

3.6.3.1 What do you have to set for communication via PROFINET?


Check the communication settings using the following table. If you answer "Yes" to these
questions, you have correctly set the communication settings and can control the converter
via the fieldbus.

Questions Answer/description
Is the converter correctly connected to the bus net- Integrating converters into PROFINET (Page 70)
work?
Do the IP address and device name in the converter and Configuring communication to the control (Page 71)
control match?
Is the same telegram set in the converter as in the Setting the telegram in the control
higher-level control?
Are the signals that the converter and the control ex- Interconnect signals in the converter in conformance with
change via PROFINET correctly interconnected? PROFIdrive.
PROFIDRIVE profile - Cyclic communication (Page 17)
PROFIDRIVE profile - Acyclic communication (Page 49)

Communication with the control, even when the line voltage is switched off
So that communication with the control system in your plant or system continues to function
even when the line voltage is switched off, you must externally supply the converter/Control
Unit with 24 V DC. To do this, use terminals 31 and 32 or connector X01 (X01/X02 with
G115D). You can find additional details in the operating instructions for the converter or the
Control Unit.

3.6.3.2 Configuring communication to the control

Configuring the communication using SIMATIC S7 control


If the converter is not included in the hardware library, you have the following options:
• Install the current Startdrive version.
• Install the GSDML of the converter using "Options/Manage general station description
(GSD)" in the components catalog.

Configuring the communication using a non-Siemens control


1. Import the device file (GSDML) of the converter into the calculation tool for your control
system.
2. Configure the communication.

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 71
Communication via PROFIBUS and PROFINET
3.6 Communication via PROFINET

Configuring communication with Startdrive


Proceed as follows to make the settings for communication with the control system.
• Activate the following windows in Startdrive: "View/Project tree" and "View/Inspector
window".
• Open the drive in the project tree and double click on "Device configuration".
This opens the dialog in the inspector window for setting the PROFINET interface.
• Click on "Ethernet addresses".
• Enter the appropriate values.

You have configured communication with the control system.



You can enter or read out data directly via the parameter view. To do this, select the
"Communication" parameter group and the "Show advanced parameters" option.

Fieldbuses
72 Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG
Communication via PROFIBUS and PROFINET
3.6 Communication via PROFINET

3.6.3.3 Installing GSDML

Procedure
1. Save the GSDML to your PC.
– With Internet access:
GSDML (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/13222/dl)
– Without Internet access:
Insert a memory card into the converter.
Set p0804 = 12.
The converter writes the GSDML as a zipped file (*.zip) into directory
/SIEMENS/SINAMICS/DATA/CFG on the memory card.
2. Unzip the GSDML file on your computer.
3. Import the GSDML into the engineering system of the controller.
You have now installed the GSDML in the engineering system of the controller.

3.6.3.4 Activating diagnostics via the control


The converter provides the functionality to transmit fault and alarm messages (diagnostic
messages) to the higher-level control according to the PROFIdrive error classes.
The functionality must be selected in the higher-level controller and activated by powering
up.

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 73
Communication via PROFIBUS and PROFINET
3.6 Communication via PROFINET

3.6.4 PROFIenergy

3.6.4.1 Energy-saving mode

Overview
PROFIenergy is a standard based on PROFINET. PROFIenergy is certified and described in the
PROFIenergy profile of the PNO.
The higher-level controller transfers the control commands and status queries in acyclic
operation via data record 80A0 hex.
The converter supports PROFIenergy profile V1.1 and function unit class 3.
G110M, G120 and G120C converters support energy-saving mode 2.
G120D converters support energy-saving mode 1.

Function description
Behavior of the converter with active energy-saving mode 2:
• The converter outputs alarm A08800.
• The RDY LED flashes green: 500 ms on, 3 000 ms off.

• The converter does not send any diagnostic interrupts.


• If the higher-level controller goes to stop or the bus connection to the higher-level
controller is interrupted, the converter exits the energy-saving mode and resumes normal
operation.
Behavior of the converter with active energy-saving mode 1:
• The converter switches off the supply voltage for its digital outputs if they are not
interconnected with r5613.x (displays the energy-saving mode) or are being used as
safety-relevant outputs.
• The converter switches off the supply voltage of its encoders unless they are HTL encoders
assigned to the position controller.

Example
You can find an application example for PROFIenergy on the Internet:
PROFIenergy - saving energy with SIMATIC S7
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/41986454)

Parameters

Number Name Factory setting


r5600 Pe energy-saving mode ID -
r5613 CO/BO: Pe energy-saving active/inactive -

Fieldbuses
74 Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG
Communication via PROFIBUS and PROFINET
3.6 Communication via PROFINET

3.6.4.2 Control commands

Function description

Command Explanation
Start_Pause Switches to the energy-saving mode depending on the pause dura-
tion.
Start_Pause_with_time_respons Switches to the energy-saving mode depending on the pause dura-
e tion and also specifies the transition times in the command re-
sponse
End_Pause Switches from the energy-saving mode to the operating state.
Cancels switching from the operating state to energy-saving mode.

Settings
• Minimum pause time: p5602
– When the pause time sent using the command "Start_Pause" is equal to or greater than
the value in p5602[1], the converter goes to energy-saving mode.
– If the pause time is less than p5602[1], the converter rejects the command
"Start_Pause" with 50 hex (no appropriate pause mode).
If the controller sends the command "End_Pause" or "Start_Pause" with a pause time of 0,
the motor cannot be switched on. An OFF1/ON command is required to switch the motor
on again.
• Maximum pause time: p5606
• Disable PROFIenergy
If you set p5611.0 = 1, you disable the response of the converter to PROFIenergy control
commands. In this case, the converter rejects the "Start_Pause" command with 50 hex (no
appropriate pause mode).
• Transition to energy-saving mode
– With p5611.2 = 0, you enable the transition to energy-saving mode from operating
state S1 (switching on inhibited) or S2 (ready to switch on).
– With p5611.2 = 1, you enable the transition to energy-saving mode from operating
states S3 (ready for operation) and S4 (operation).
To do this, you must also set the following:
– p5611.1 = 1: With the transition to energy-saving mode, the converter triggers an
OFF1 command and enters the switching on inhibited state (S1).
– p5611.1 = 0: You use p5614 to interconnect a signal source that you use to switch off
the converter and place it in switching on inhibited state (S1).

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 75
Communication via PROFIBUS and PROFINET
3.6 Communication via PROFINET

3.6.4.3 Status queries

Function description

Command Explanation
List_Energy_Saving_Modes Returns all supported energy-saving modes
Get_Mode Returns information about the selected energy-saving mode
PEM_Status Returns the current PROFIenergy status
PEM_Status_with_CTTO Returns the current PROFIenergy status together with the regular
transition time to the operating state
PE_ldentify Returns the supported PROFIenergy commands
Query_Version Returns the implemented PROFIenergy profile
Get_Measurement_List Returns the measured value IDs that can be accessed using the
"Get_Measurement_Values" command
Get_Measurement_List_with_ob Returns the measured value IDs and the associated object number
ject_number that can be accessed using the
"Get_Measurement_Values_with_object_number" command.
Get_Measurement_Values Returns the measured values requested via the measured value ID
Get_Measurement_Values_with Returns the measured values requested via the measured value ID
_object_number and the object number. The object number corresponds to the drive
object ID.

Fieldbuses
76 Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG
Communication via PROFIBUS and PROFINET
3.6 Communication via PROFINET

3.6.4.4 Error values and measured values

Function description

Table 3- 19 Error values in the parameter response

Error Meaning
value 1
001 hex Invalid Service_Request_ID
03 hex Invalid Modifier
04 hex Invalid Data_Structure_Identifier_RQ
06 hex No PE energy-saving mode supported
07 hex Response too long
08 hex Invalid block header
50 hex No suitable energy-saving mode available
51 hex Time is not supported
52 hex Impermissible PE_Mode_ID
53 hex No switch to energy saving mode because of state operate
54 hex Service or function temporarily not available

Table 3- 20 Measured values

PROFIenergy SINAMICS source parameters Value


range
Measured value Accuracy Uni
t
ID Name Do- Class Num- Name
main ber
34 Active power 1 12 W r0032 Active power smoothed r2004
166 Power factor 1 12 1 r0038 Power factor smoothed 0…1
200 Active energy 2 11 Wh r0039[ Energy drawn -
import 1]

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 77
Communication via PROFIBUS and PROFINET
3.6 Communication via PROFINET

3.6.5 The converter with PROFINET interface as Ethernet node.


As default setting, the converter is set for PROFINET IO communication. Alternatively, you
have the option of integrating the converter into an Ethernet network via the PROFINET
interface.
This means that from any location in a network, you can use Startdrive to make diagnostic
queries, change parameters or carry out commissioning work.
PROFINET I/O communication is not possible with the converter as Ethernet node.

Integrating a converter into an Ethernet network (assigning an IP address)

Procedure
1. Set p8924 (PN DHCP mode) = 2 or 3
– p8924 = 2
The DHCP server assigns the IP address based on the MAC address of the converter
– p8924 = 3
The DHCP server assigns the IP address based on the device name of the converter
2. Save the settings with p8925 = 2. The next time that the converter switches on, it retrieves
the IP address. After this, you can address the converter as an Ethernet node.

Note
Immediate switchover without restart
The switchover to DHCP is performed immediately and without a restart if the change is
carried out with the EtherNet/IP command "Set Attribute Single" (class F5 hex, attribute 3).
The following options are available:
• Via an EtherNet/IP controller
• Via an EtherNet/IP commissioning tool

You have now integrated the converter into Ethernet

Displays
r8930: Device name of the converter
r8934: Operating mode, PN or DHCP
r8935: MAC address

Fieldbuses
78 Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG
Communication via PROFIBUS and PROFINET
3.6 Communication via PROFINET

Additional options of integrating converters into Ethernet


You also have the option of integrating the converter into Ethernet using Proneta or STEP 7,
for example.
Here is the example of the "Edit Ethernet station" screen form from Step 7, which you can use
to make the required settings.

See also
Overview of the manuals (Page 244)

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 79
Communication via PROFIBUS and PROFINET
3.7 Communication via PROFIBUS

3.7 Communication via PROFIBUS

The PROFIBUS DP interface has the following functions:


• Cyclic communication
• Acyclic communication
• Diagnostic alarms
General information on PROFIBUS DP can be found in the Internet:
• PROFIBUS information
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/1971286)
• Installation guidelines of the PNO (http://www.profibus.com/downloads/installation-
guide/)

Fieldbuses
80 Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG
Communication via PROFIBUS and PROFINET
3.7 Communication via PROFIBUS

3.7.1 Converters with PROFIBUS interface


You can find the connectors and the connector assignments of the PROFIBUS DP interface in
the following tables.
You can implement a line-type topology using the two connectors at the converter. You can
use switches to realize other topologies.

Table 3- 21 Assignment table - connectors

Converter/Control Unit Connection via


X126 X03, on X04, off
(D Sub - sock- (M12) (M12)
et)

G120
• CU230P-2 DP x

• CU240B-2 DP x

• CU240E-2 DP x

• CU240E-2 DP-F x

• CU250S-2 DP x

G120C
• G120C DP x

G120D
• CU240D-2 DP x x

• CU240D-2 DP-F x x

• CU250D-2 DP-F x x

G110M
• CU240M DP x x

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 81
Communication via PROFIBUS and PROFINET
3.7 Communication via PROFIBUS

Table 3- 22 Connector pin assignments

Signal X126 X03, on X04, off


(D Sub - socket) (M12) (M12)

Shield, ground connection 1 5 5


--- 2 1 1
RxD/TxD-P, receive and transmit (B/B’) 3 4 4
CNTR-P, control signal 4 --- ---
DGND, reference potential for data (C/C’) 5 --- ---
VP, supply voltage 6 --- ---
--- 7 3 3
RxD/TxD-N, receive and transmit (A/A’) 8 2 2
--- 9 --- ---

Recommended PROFIBUS connectors


We recommend connectors with the following article numbers for connecting the PROFIBUS
cable:
• 6GK1500-0FC10
• 6GK1500-0EA02

Fieldbuses
82 Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG
Communication via PROFIBUS and PROFINET
3.7 Communication via PROFIBUS

3.7.2 What do you have to set for communication via PROFIBUS?

Configuring PROFIBUS communication


You require the appropriate engineering system to configure PROFIBUS communication in the
PROFIBUS master.
If required, load the GSD file of the converter into the engineering system.
Configuring communication to the control system (Page 84)

Setting the address


Set the address of the PROFIBUS slave.
Set the PROFIBUS address (Page 86)

Setting the telegram


Set the same telegram in the converter as in the PROFIBUS master. Interconnect the
telegrams in the control program of the PROFIBUS master with the signals of your choosing.
PROFIDRIVE profile - Cyclic communication (Page 17)

Application examples
You can find application examples for PROFIBUS communication on the Internet:
Controlling the speed of a SINAMICS G110M/G120/G120C/G120D with S7-300/400F via
PROFINET or PROFIBUS, with Safety Integrated (via terminal) and HMI
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/60441457)
Controlling the speed of a SINAMICS G110M / G120 (Startdrive) with S7-1500 (TO) via
PROFINET or PROFIBUS, with Safety Integrated (via terminal) and HMI
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/78788716)

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 83
Communication via PROFIBUS and PROFINET
3.7 Communication via PROFIBUS

3.7.3 Integrating converters into PROFIBUS


To connect the converter to a control system via PROFIBUS DP, proceed as follows:
1. Integrate the converter into the bus system (e.g. line topology) of the control using
PROFIBUS cables.
– Converters with IP20 degree of protection using socket X126
– Converters with IP65 degree of protection (CU240D/CU250D) via X03 and X04
The position of the socket is given in the operating instructions for the converter.
Pin assignment: Converters with PROFIBUS interface (Page 81).
The maximum permitted cable length to the previous station and the subsequent one is
100 m at a baud rate of 12 Mbps. You can achieve a maximum cable length of 400 m by
using a maximum of 3 repeaters.
2. Externally supply the converter with 24 V DC through terminals 31 and 32 or via X01.
The external 24 V supply is only required if communications with the control system
should also operate when the line voltage is switched off.
You have now connected the converter to the control system using PROFIBUS DP.

3.7.4 Configuring communication to the control system


Configure the communication in the control system after you have connected the converter
to the bus.

3.7.4.1 Configuring the communication using SIMATIC S7 control


• If the converter is listed in the component catalog in the TIA Portal, you can configure the
communication in the SIMATIC control.
• If the converter is not listed in the hardware library, you can either install the newest
Startdrive version or install the GSD of the converter via "Extras/GSD-Install file" in HW-
Config.

3.7.4.2 Configuring the communication with a third-party control system


If you are working with a third-party control system, you must install the device file (GSD) of
the converter in the control before you configure the communication.
Installing the GSD (Page 85) .
If you have installed the GSD, configure the communication. To do this, follow the
documentation of your control system.

Fieldbuses
84 Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG
Communication via PROFIBUS and PROFINET
3.7 Communication via PROFIBUS

3.7.4.3 Installing the GSD

Procedure
1. Save the GSD on your PC using one of the following methods.
– With Internet access:
GSD (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/22339653/133100)
– Without Internet access:
Insert a memory card into the converter.
Set p0804 = 12.
The converter writes the GSD as zipped file (*.zip) into directory
/SIEMENS/SINAMICS/DATA/CFG on the memory card.
2. Unzip the GSD file on your computer.
3. Import the GSD in the engineering system of the controller.
You have now installed the GSD file in the engineering system of the controller.

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 85
Communication via PROFIBUS and PROFINET
3.7 Communication via PROFIBUS

3.7.5 Set the PROFIBUS address

Valid address area: 1 … 125


You have the following options for setting the address:
• Using the address switch on the Control Unit:

Figure 3-28 Address switch with example for bus address 10

The address switch has priority over the other settings.


• With a commissioning tool, e.g. an operator panel, via parameter p0918 (factory setting:
p0918 = 126).
It is only possible to change p0918 if an invalid address is set in the address switch.
You can find the position of the address switch in the operating instructions for the
converter.
Manuals and technical support (Page 244)

Activating the changed bus address

Procedure
1. Set the address as described above.
2. Switch off the converter power supply.
3. Wait until all LEDs on the converter are dark.
4. Switch on the converter power supply again.
Your settings become effective after switching on.
You have now set the bus address.

Fieldbuses
86 Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG
Communication via PROFIBUS and PROFINET
3.8 Select telegram

3.8 Select telegram

Requirement
In the basic commissioning you have selected the control using PROFIBUS or PROFINET.

Telegrams for SINAMICS G120 converters


The following table shows all of the telegrams for the G120 converter.
In your converter, you have a list of telegrams for selection that are available for your
particular converter.

Value p0922
1: Standard telegram 1, PZD-2/2 (factory setting, exceptions: CU250D and CU250S)
2: Standard telegramm 2, PZD-4/4
3: Standard telegram 3, PZD-5/9
4: Standard telegram 4, PZD-6/14
7: Standard telegram 7, PZD 2/2 (factory setting CU250D)
9: Standard telegram 9, PZD-10/5
20: Standard telegram 20, PZD-2/6
110: SIEMENS telegram 110, PZD-12/7
112: SIEMENS telegram 111, PZD-12/12
350: SIEMENS telegram 350, PZD-4/4
352: SIEMENS telegram 352, PZD-6/6
353: SIEMENS telegram 353, PZD-2/2, PKW-4/4
354: SIEMENS telegram 354, PZD-6/6, PKW-4/4
999: Free telegram
Extend telegram/change signal interconnection (Page 32) (factory setting,
CU250S)
For further information about telegrams:
PROFIDRIVE profile - Cyclic communication (Page 17).

Telegrams for SINAMICS G115D converters


The list of telegrams for the SINAMICS G115D converters can be found in the G115D
operating instructions. See:
Manuals and technical support (Page 244)

PROFIsafe telegram selection


The settings for the PROFIsafe telegram selection are described in the "Safety Integrated"
Function Manual.

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 87
Communication via PROFIBUS and PROFINET
3.8 Select telegram

Fieldbuses
88 Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG
Communication via EtherNet/IP 4
Overview
EtherNet/IP is real-time Ethernet, and is mainly used in automation technology.
The following options are available for integrating SINAMICS G converters into EtherNet/IP:
• You can use the SINAMICS profile.
• You can use the ODVA AC/DC drive profile.
• You can define the assemblies for the process data using the objects that are supported by
the converter.

See also
Configuring communication (Page 94)
The pin assignment and the connectors that you require for your converter are listed in the
following tables.
You can implement a line-type topology using the two sockets at the converter. You only
require one of the two sockets at the beginning and end of a line.
You can use switches to realize other topologies.

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 89
Communication via EtherNet/IP
4.1 Converters with Ethernet/IP interface

4.1 Converters with Ethernet/IP interface

Table 4- 1 Assignment table

Converter/Control Unit Connection via


X150 P1/ X03/X04 X03/X04
X150 P2 (RJ45) (M12)
(RJ45)

G120
• CU230P-2 PN x

• CU240E-2 PN x

• CU240E-2 PN-F x

• CU250S-2 PN x

G120C
• G120C PN x

G120D
• CU240D-2 PN x

• CU240D-2 PN-F x

• CU250D-2 PN-F x

• CU240D-2 PN-F [PP] x

• CU250D-2 PN-F [PP] x

G110M
• CU240M PN x

G115D
• G115D PN x
(X150 P1/P2)

Fieldbuses
90 Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG
Communication via EtherNet/IP
4.1 Converters with Ethernet/IP interface

Table 4- 2 Connector pin assignments

Signal X150 P1/ X03/X04 X03/X04, X150


X150 P2 (RJ45) P1/P2
(RJ45) (M12)

TX- Transmit data - 1 1 1


RX+, Receive data + 3 2 2
TX+ Transmit data + 2 3 3
RX- Receive data - 6 6 4
--- 4 4 ---
--- 5 5 ---
--- 7 7 ---
--- 8 8 ---

Recommended connector
RJ45, IP20: 6GK1901-1BB10-2Ax0
Information for assembling the SIMATIC NET Industrial Ethernet FastConnect RF45 plug 180
can be found on the Internet:
Assembly instructions for the SIMATIC NET Industrial Ethernet FastConnect RJ45 plug
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/15251/man)

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 91
Communication via EtherNet/IP
4.2 Connect converter to EtherNet/IP

4.2 Connect converter to EtherNet/IP

Overview
To connect the converter to a control system via Ethernet, proceed as follows:

Procedure
1. Connect the converter to the control system via an Ethernet cable.
2. Create an object for data exchange.
You have the following options:
– Load the EDS file into your controller if you want to use the ODVA profile.
You can find the EDS file on the Internet:
EDS (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/de/view/78026217)
– If your controller does not accept the EDS file, or if you wish to use the SINAMICS
profile, you must create a generic module in your controller:
Create generic I/O module (Page 110)
You have connected the converter to the control system via EtherNet/IP.

Example
You can find an example showing how to connect a converter to the control system via
Ethernet/IP on the Internet:
Application example (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/82843076)

Further information
You can find information on routing and shielding Ethernet cables on the Internet:
EtherNet/IP
(http://www.odva.org/Home/ODVATECHNOLOGIES/EtherNetIP/EtherNetIPLibrary/tabid/76/lng/
en-US/Default.aspx)

See also
Manuals and technical support (Page 244)

Fieldbuses
92 Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG
Communication via EtherNet/IP
4.3 What do you need for communication via EtherNet/IP?

4.3 What do you need for communication via EtherNet/IP?


Check the communication settings using the following questions. If you answer "Yes" to the
questions, you have correctly set the communication settings and can control the converter
via the fieldbus.
• Is the converter correctly connected to the EtherNet/IP?
• Is the EDS file installed in your control system?
• Have the bus interface and IP address been correctly set?
• Have the signals that the converter and the control system exchange been correctly
interconnected?

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 93
Communication via EtherNet/IP
4.4 Configuring communication

4.4 Configuring communication

Overview
EtherNet/IP is realtime Ethernet, and is mainly used in automation technology.

Function description
You must set the following parameters to configure the converter communication via
EtherNet/IP:

Procedure
1. p2030 = 10
2. The following parameters must match your EtherNet configuration:
– p8921 = IP address
– p8922 = standard gateway
– p8923 = subnet mask
– p8920 = station name
3. p8925 = 2
4. Select the EtherNet/IP profile:

SINAMICS profile ODVA AC/DC drive profile


p8980 = 0 p8980 = 1
Select the appropriate telegram p0922 = 1: The converter communicates using telegram 1. Other
using p0922. telegrams are not possible. However, when required you can
extend telegram 1.
PROFIDRIVE profile -
Cyclic communication Extend telegrams and change signal interconnection
(Page 17) (Page 32)
When required, set the following parameters:
• p8981
• p8982
• p8983

5. Switch off the converter power supply.


6. Wait until all LEDs on the converter are dark.
7. Switch on the converter power supply again.
You have now configured the converter for communication via EtherNet/IP.

Fieldbuses
94 Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG
Communication via EtherNet/IP
4.4 Configuring communication

Parameter

Number Name Factory setting


p2030 Fieldbus interface protocol selection Dependent on the
0: no protocol converter

10: EtherNet/IP
p8920 PN Name of Station -
p8921 PN IP Address 0
p8922 PN Default Gateway 0
p8923 PN Subnet Mask 0
p8925 Activate PN interface configuration 0
0: No function
1: Reserved
2: Activate the configuration and save
3: Delete configuration
r8931 PN IP Address actual -
r8932 PN Default Gateway actual -
r8933 PN Subnet Mask actual -
p8980 EtherNet/IP profile 0
0: SINAMICS
1: ODVA AC/DC
p8981 EtherNet/IP ODVA STOP mode 0
0: OFF1
1: OFF2
p8982 EtherNet/IP ODVA speed scaling 128
123: 32
124: 16

128: 1
129: 0.5

133: 0.03125
p8983 EtherNet/IP ODVA torque scaling 128
Values the same as p8982

More information
EtherNet/IP objects and assemblies of the converter:
Supported objects (Page 96)

See also
Overview of the manuals (Page 244)

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 95
Communication via EtherNet/IP
4.5 Supported objects

4.5 Supported objects

Overview

Object class Object name Objects re- ODVA objects SINAMICS


quired objects
hex dec
1 hex 1 Identity object x
4 hex 4 Assembly Object x
6 hex 6 Connection Manager Object x
28 hex 40 Motor Data Object x
29 hex 41 Supervisor Object x
2A hex 42 Drive Object x
32C hex 812 Siemens Drive Object x
32D hex 813 Siemens Motor Data Object x
F5 hex 245 TCP/IP Interface Object 1) x
F6 hex 246 Ethernet Link Object 1) x
300 hex 768 Stack Diagnostic Object x x
302 hex 770 Adapter Diagnostic Object x x
303 hex 771 Explicit Messages Diagnostic Object x x
304 hex 772 Explicit Message Diagnostic List Object x x
401 hex 1025 Parameter object x x
1) These objects are part of the EtherNet/IP system management.

Identity Object, Instance Number: 1 hex

Supported services
Class • Get Attribute all Instance • Get Attribute all
• Get Attribute single • Get Attribute single
• Reset

Table 4- 3 Class Attribute

No. Service Type Name


1 get UINT16 Revision
2 get UINT16 Max Instance
3 get UINT16 Num of Instances

Fieldbuses
96 Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG
Communication via EtherNet/IP
4.5 Supported objects

Table 4- 4 Instance Attribute

No. Service Type Name Value/explanation


1 get UINT16 Vendor ID 1251
2 get UINT16 Device Type
- ODVA AC Drive 02 hex
- Siemens Drive 12 hex
3 get UINT16 Product code r0964[1]
4 get UINT16 Revision The versions should match the EDS file
5 get UINT16 Status See the following table
6 get UINT32 Serial number bits 0 … 19: consecutive number;
bits 20 … 23: Production identifier
bits 24 … 27: Month of manufacture (0 = Jan, B =
Dec)
Bits 28 … 31: Year of manufacture (0 = 2002)
7 get Short Product name Max. length 32 bytes
String

Table 4- 5 Explanation of No. 5 of the previous table

Byte Bit Name Description


1 0 Owned 0: Converter is not assigned to any master
1: Converter is assigned to a master
1 Reserved
2 Configured 0: Ethernet/IP basic settings
1: Modified Ethernet/IP settings
For G120, always = 1
3 Reserved
4…7 Extended Device 0: Self-test or status not known
Status 1: Firmware update active
2: At least one I/O connection with error
3: No I/O connections
4: Incorrect configuration in the ROM
5: Fatal fault
6: At least one I/O connection is active
7: All I/O connections in the quiescent state
8 … 15: Reserved
2 8 … 11 Not used
12 … 15 Reserved

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 97
Communication via EtherNet/IP
4.5 Supported objects

Assembly Object, Instance Number: 4 hex

Supported services
Class • Get Attribute single Instance • Get Attribute single
• Set Attribute single

Table 4- 6 Class Attribute

No. Service Type Name


1 get UINT16 Revision
2 get UINT16 Max Instance
3 get UINT16 Num of Instances

Table 4- 7 Instance Attribute

No. Service Type Name Value/explanation


3 set Array of Assembly 1 byte array
UINT8 Supported ODVA AC/DC assemblies (Page 109)

Connection Manager Object, Instance Number: 6 hex

Supported services
Class • Get Attribute all Instance • Forward open
• Get Attribute single • Forward close
• Get Attribute single
• Set Attribute single

Table 4- 8 Class Attribute

No. Service Type Name


1 get UINT16 Revision
2 get UINT16 Max Instance
3 get UINT16 Num of Instances

Table 4- 9 Instance Attribute

No. Service Type Name Value/explanation


1 get UINT16 OpenReqs Counters
2 get UINT16 OpenFormat Rejects Counters
3 get UINT16 OpenResource Rejects Counters
4 get UINT16 OpenOther Rejects Counters
5 get UINT16 CloseReqs Counters
6 get UINT16 CloseFormat Rejects Counters
7 get UINT16 CloseOther Rejects Counters
8 get UINT16 ConnTimeouts Counters; Number of bus errors

Fieldbuses
98 Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG
Communication via EtherNet/IP
4.5 Supported objects

Motor Data Object, Instance Number 28 hex

Supported services
Class • Get Attribute single Instance • Get Attribute single
• Set Attribute single

Table 4- 10 Class Attribute

No. Ser- Type Name


vice
1 get UINT16 Revision
2 get UINT16 Max Instance
3 get UINT16 Num of Instances

Table 4- 11 Instance Attribute

No. Service Type Name Value/explanation


3 get, set USINT Motor Type p0300 motor type, see the following table
6 get, set UINT16 Rated Current p0305 rated motor current
7 get, set UINT16 Rated Voltage p0304 rated motor voltage
8 get, set UINT32 Rated Power p0307 rated motor power
9 get, set UINT16 Rated Frequency p0310 rated motor frequency
10 get, set UINT16 Rated Temperature p0605 motor temperature threshold
11 get, set UINT16 Max Speed p0322 maximum motor speed
12 get, set UINT16 Pole Count p0314 value of p0314*2
13 get, UINT32 Torque Constant p0316 motor torque constant
set1)
14 get, set UINT32 Inertia p0341 motor moment of inertia
15 get, set UINT16 Base Speed p0311 motor rated speed
1) G115D: Only "get" possible.

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 99
Communication via EtherNet/IP
4.5 Supported objects

Value in p0300 Ethernet/IP motor data object


0 no motor 0 Non-standard motor
1 Induction motor 7 Squirrel-cage induction motor
2 Synchronous motor 3 PM synchronous motor
10 1LE1 induction motor 7 Squirrel-cage induction motor
13 1LG6 induction motor 7 Squirrel-cage induction motor
17 1LA7 induction motor 7 Squirrel-cage induction motor
19 1LA9 induction motor 7 Squirrel-cage induction motor
100 1LE1 induction motor 7 Squirrel-cage induction motor
104 1PH4 induction motor 3 PM synchronous motor
107 1PH7 induction motor 0 Non-standard motor
108 1PH8 induction motor 5 Switched reluctance motor
200 1PH8 synchronous motor 0 Non-standard motor
204 1LE4 synchronous motor 3 PM synchronous motor
237 1FK7 synchronous motor 0 Non-standard motor
10000 Motor with DRIVE-CLiQ 0 Non-standard motor
10001 Motor with DRIVE-CLiQ 2nd D 0 Non-standard motor

Supervisor Object, Instance Number: 29 hex

Supported services
Class • Get Attribute single Instance • Get Attribute single
• Set Attribute single

Table 4- 12 Class Attribute

No. Ser- Type Name


vice
1 get UINT16 Revision
2 get UINT16 Max Instance
3 get UINT16 Num of Instances

Fieldbuses
100 Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG
Communication via EtherNet/IP
4.5 Supported objects

Table 4- 13 Instance Attribute

No. Service Type Name Value/explanation


3 get, set Bool Run1 STW.0 operation, clockwise rotation
5 get, set Bool Net Control Internal
0: Local
1: Network
6 get UINT8 State 0: Vendor Specific
1: Startup
2: Not_Ready
3: Ready
4: Enabled
5: Stopping
6: Fault_Stop
7: Faulted
7 get Bool Running1 ZSW1:2
1: - (Enabled and Run1) or
- (Stopping and Running1) or
- (Fault_Stop and Running1)
0 = Other state
9 get Bool Ready ZSW1:0
1: - Ready or
- Enabled or
- Stopping
0 = Other state
10 get Bool Fault ZSW1:3 drive fault
11 get Bool Warning ZSW1:7 alarm active
12 get, set Bool Fault reset STW.7 acknowledge fault
13 get UINT16 Fault Code r945[0] error code
14 get UINT16 Warning Code r2122[0] alarm code
15 get Bool CtlFromNet Display from Net Control
1: Control from network
0: Local control

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 101
Communication via EtherNet/IP
4.5 Supported objects

Drive Object, Instance Number: 2A hex

Supported services
Class • Get Attribute single Instance • Get Attribute single
• Set Attribute single

Table 4- 14 Class Attribute

No. Ser- Type Name


vice
1 get UINT16 Revision
2 get UINT16 Max Instance
3 get UINT16 Num of Instances

Table 4- 15 Instance Attribute

No. Ser- Type Name Value/explanation


vice
3 get Bool At reference r2197.4 (for G115D: r2197.7)
1: Speed setp - act val deviation in tolerance t_off
0: Otherwise
4 get, set Bool Net_reference Internal
0: Local
1: Network
(for G115D: "get" only)
6 get UINT8 Drive_Mode p1300 manufacturer-specific, see following table
7 get INT Speed Actual Main actual value, see speed units
8 get, set INT Speed Ref Main setpoint, see speed units
9 get INT Current Actual r0027 absolute current actual value, smoothed
10 get, INT Current limit p0323 maximum motor current
set1)
15 get INT Power Actual r0032 actual active power smoothed
16 get INT Output voltage r0025 output voltage smoothed
17 get INT Output voltage r0072 output voltage
18 get, set UINT16 AccelTime p1120 ramp-function generator ramp-up time
19 get, set UINT16 DecelTime p1121 ramp-function generator, ramp-down time
20 get, set UINT16 Low Speed Lim p1080 minimum speed
21 get, set UINT16 High Speed Lim p1082 maximum speed
22 get, set SINT Speed Scale p8982 Ethernet/IP ODVA speed scaling
29 get Bool Ref From Net Internal - display of Net_Reference
0: Local
1: Network
1) G115D: Only "get" possible.

Fieldbuses
102 Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG
Communication via EtherNet/IP
4.5 Supported objects

Value in p1300 Ethernet/IP motor data object


0 U/f with linear characteristic 1 Open loop speed (frequency)
1 U/f with linear characteristic and FCC 0 Vendor-specific mode
2 U/f with parabolic characteristic
3 U/f with parameterizable characteristic
4 U/f with linear characteristic and ECO
5 U/f for drives requiring a precise frequency (e.g. in
the textile sector)
6 U/f for drives requiring a precise frequency and FCC
7 U/f for parabolic characteristic and ECO
19 U/f with independent voltage setpoint
20 Speed control (without encoder) 2 Closed-loop speed control
22 Torque control (without encoder) 3 Torque control

Siemens Drive Object, Instance Number: 32C hex

Supported services
Class • Get Attribute single Instance • Get Attribute single
• Set Attribute single

Table 4- 16 Class Attribute

No. Service Type Name


1 get UINT16 Revision
2 get UINT16 Max Instance
3 get UINT16 Num of Instances

Table 4- 17 Instance Attribute

No. Type Service Name Value/explanation


2 INT16 get, set Commissioning state p0010 commissioning parameter filter
3 … 18 WORD get STW1 STW1 bit-by-bit access:
Attr.3 = STW1.0
Attr.18 = STW1.15
19 WORD get Main setpoint Main setpoint
20 … 35 WORD get ZSW1 ZSW1 bit-by-bit access:
Attr.20 = ZSW1.0
Attr.35 = ZSW1.15
36 WORD get Actual Frequency Main actual value (actual frequency)
37 REAL get, set Ramp Up Time p1120[0] ramp-function generator
ramp-up time
38 REAL get, set Ramp Down Time p1121[0] ramp-function generator
ramp-down time
39 REAL get, set Current Limit p0640[0] current limit
40 REAL get, set Frequency MAX Limit p1082[0] maximum speed

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 103
Communication via EtherNet/IP
4.5 Supported objects

No. Type Service Name Value/explanation


41 REAL get, set Frequency MIN Limit p1080[0] minimum speed
42 REAL get, set OFF3 Ramp Down Time p1135[0] OFF3 ramp-down time
43 UINT32 get, set PID Enable p2200[0] technology controller enable
/ BOOL
44 REAL get, set PID Filter Time Constant p2265 technology controller actual
value filter time constant
45 REAL get, set PID D Gain p2274 technology controller differenti-
ation time constant
46 REAL get, set PID P Gain p2280 technology controller propor-
tional gain
47 REAL get, set PID I Gain p2285 technology controller integral
time
48 REAL get, set PID Up Limit p2291 technology controller maximum
limiting
49 REAL get, set PID Down Limit p2292 technology controller minimum
limiting
50 REAL get Speed setpoint r0020 speed setpoint
51 REAL get Output Frequency r0024 output frequency
52 REAL get Output Voltage r0025 output voltage
53 REAL get DC Link Voltage r0026[0] DC-link voltage
54 REAL get Actual Current r0027 current actual value
55 REAL get Actual Torque r0031 torque actual value
56 REAL get Output power r0032 actual active power value
57 REAL get Motor Temperature r0035[0] motor temperature
58 REAL get Power Unit Tempera- r0037[0] power unit temperature
ture
59 REAL get Energy kWh r0039 energy display
60 UINT8 get CDS Eff (Local Mode) r0050 active command data set
61 WORD get Status Word 2 r0053 status word 2
62 WORD get Control Word 1 r0054 control word 1
63 REAL get Motor Speed (Encoder) r0061 actual speed value
64 UINT32 get Digital Inputs r0722 digital inputs status
65 UINT32 get Digital Outputs r0747 digital outputs status
66 REAL get Analog Input 1 r0752[0] analog input 1
67 REAL get Analog Input 2 r0752[1] analog input 2
68 REAL get Analog Output 1 r0774[0] analog output 1
69 REAL get Analog Output 2 r0774[1] analog output 2
70 UINT16 get Fault Code 1 r0947[0] fault number 1
71 UINT16 get Fault Code 2 r0947[1] fault number 2
72 UINT16 get Fault Code 3 r0947[2] fault number 3
73 UINT16 get Fault Code 4 r0947[3] fault number 4
74 UINT16 get Fault Code 5 r0947[4] fault number 5
75 UINT16 get Fault Code 6 r0947[5] fault number 6
76 UINT16 get Fault Code 7 r0947[6] fault number 7
77 UINT16 get Fault Code 8 r0947[7] fault number 8
78 REAL get Pulse Frequency r1801 pulse frequency
79 UINT16 get Alarm Code 1 r2110[0] alarm number 1
80 UINT16 get Alarm Code 2 r2110[1] alarm number 2

Fieldbuses
104 Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG
Communication via EtherNet/IP
4.5 Supported objects

No. Type Service Name Value/explanation


81 UINT16 get Alarm Code 3 r2110[2] alarm number 3
82 UINT16 get Alarm Code 4 r2110[3] alarm number 4
83 REAL get PID setpoint Output r2260 technology controller setpoint
after the ramp-function generator
84 REAL get PID Feedback r2266 technology controller actual
value after the filter
85 REAL get PID Output r2294 technology controller output
signal

Siemens Motor Data Object, Instance Number: 32D hex

Supported services
Class • Get Attribute single Instance • Get Attribute single
• Set Attribute single

Table 4- 18 Class Attribute

No. Service Type Name


1 get UINT16 Revision
2 get UINT16 Max Instance
3 get UINT16 Num of Instances

Table 4- 19 Instance Attribute

No. Service Type Name Value/explanation

2 get, set UINT16 Commissioning p0010


state
3 get INT16 Motor Type p0300
6 get, set REAL Rated Current p0305
7 get, set REAL Rated Voltage p0304
8 get, set REAL Rated Power p0307
9 get, set REAL Rated Frequency p0310
10 get, set REAL Rated Tempera- p0605
ture
11 get, set REAL Max Speed p0322
12 get, set UINT16 Pole pair number p0314
13 get, set REAL Torque Constant p0316
14 get, set REAL Inertia p0341
15 get, set REAL Base Speed p0311
19 get, set REAL Cos Phi p0308

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 105
Communication via EtherNet/IP
4.5 Supported objects

TCP/IP Interface Object, Instance Number: F5 hex

Supported services
Class • Get Attribute all Instance • Get Attribute all
• Get Attribute single • Get Attribute single
• Set Attribute single

Table 4- 20 Class Attribute

No. Service Type Name


1 get UINT16 Revision
2 get UINT16 Max Instance
3 get UINT16 Num of Instances

Table 4- 21 Instance Attribute

No. Service Type Name Value/explanation


1 get UINT32 Status Fixed value: 1 hex
1: Configuration acknowledged, by DHCP or saved
values
2 get UINT32 Configuration Fixed value: 94 hex
Capability 4 hex: DHCP supported
10 hex: Configuration can be adjusted
80 hex: ACD-capable
3 get, set UINT32 Configuration 1 hex: Saved values
Control 3 hex: DHCP
4 get UINT16 Path Size (in Fixed value: 2 hex
WORDs)
UINT8 Path 20 hex,
F6 hex,
24 hex,
05 hex, where 5 hex is the number of instances of
F6 hex (four physical ports plus one internal port).
5 get, set STRING Interface Config- r61000 Name of Station
UINT32 uration r61001 IP address
6 get, set UINT16 Host Name Host Name Length
STRING
10 get, set UINT8 Select ACD local OM flash:
0: Disabled,
1: Enabled
11 get, set UINT8 Last Conflict local OM flash ACD Activity
UINT8 Detected local OM flash Remote MAC
UINT8 local OM flash ARP PDU

Fieldbuses
106 Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG
Communication via EtherNet/IP
4.5 Supported objects

Link Object, Instance Number: F6 hex

Supported services
Class • Get Attribute all Instance • Get Attribute all
• Get Attribute single • Get Attribute single
• Set Attribute single

Table 4- 22 Class Attribute

No. Service Type Name


1 get UINT16 Revision
2 get UINT16 Max Instance
3 get UINT16 Num of Instances

Table 4- 23 Instance Attribute

No. Service Type Name Value/explanation


1 get UINT32 Interface Speed 0: link down
10: 10 Mbps
100: 100 Mbps
2 get Interface Flags Bit 1: Link-Status
Bit 2: Duplex Mode (0: Half duplex, 1 duplex)
Bit 3 … 5: Automatic state identification
Bit 6: Reset required
Bit 7: Local hardware fault (0 = ok)
3 get ARRAY Physical Address r8935 Ethernet MAC address
4 get_and_ Struct of Interface Counters Optional; required if the Media Counters attribute is imple-
clear mented
UINT32 In Octets Received octets
UINT32 In Ucast Packets Received Unicast packets
UINT32 In NUcast Packets Received non-Unicast packets
UINT32 In Discards Incoming packets, not processed
UINT32 In Errors Incoming packets with errors
UINT32 In Unknown Protos Incoming packets with unknown protocol
UINT32 Out Octets Sent octets
UINT32 Out Ucast Packets Sent Unicast packets
UINT32 Out NUcast packets Sent non-Unicast packets
UINT32 Out Discards Outgoing packets, not processed
UINT32 Out Errors Outgoing packets, with errors
5 get_and_ Struct of Media Counters Media-specific counters
clear UINT32 Alignment Errors Structure received, which does not match the number of octets
UINT32 FCS Errors Structure received, which does not pass the FCS check
UINT32 Single Collisions Structure successfully transmitted, precisely one collision
UINT32 Multiple Collisions Structure successfully transmitted, multiple collisions
UINT32 SQE Test Errors Number of SQE errors
UINT32 Deferred Transmis- First transmission attempt delayed
sions

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 107
Communication via EtherNet/IP
4.5 Supported objects

No. Service Type Name Value/explanation


UINT32 Late Collisions Number of collisions that occurred delayed by 512 bit timers to
the request
UINT32 Excessive Collisions Transmission unsuccessful. Reason: Intensive collision
UINT32 MAC Transmit Errors Transmission unsuccessful. Reason: An internal MAC sublayer
receiving error
UINT32 Carrier Sense Errors Times that the carrier sense condition was lost or never assert-
ed when attempting to transmit a frame
UINT32 Frame Too Long Structure too large
UINT32 MAC Receive Errors Transmit unsuccessful. Reason: An internal MAC sublayer re-
ceiving error
6 get, set Struct of Interface Control -
UINT16 Control Bits -
UINT16 Forced Interface -
Speed
10 get String Interface_Label Interface-Label

Parameter Object, Instance Number: 401 hex

Supported services
Class • Get Attribute all Instance • Get Attribute all
• Set Attribute single

Table 4- 24 Class Attribute

No. Service Type Name


1 get UINT16 Revision
2 get UINT16 Max Instance
3 get UINT16 Num of Instances

Cyclic communication is established via parameter object 401.

Example: Read parameter 2050[10] (connector output to interconnect the PZD received
from the fieldbus controller)
Get Attribute single function with the following values:
• Class = 401 hex
• Instance = 2050 = 802 hex corresponds to the parameter number
• Attribute = 10 = A hex corresponds to index 10

Example: Parameter 1520[0] writing (upper torque limit)


Set Attribute single function with the following values:
• Class = 401 hex
• Instance = 1520 = 5F0 hex corresponds to the parameter number
• Attribute = 0 = 0 hex corresponds to index 0
• Data = 500.0 (value)

Fieldbuses
108 Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG
Communication via EtherNet/IP
4.5 Supported objects

4.5.1 Supported ODVA AC/DC assemblies

Overview

Number required/ Type Name


optional
hex dec

14 hex 20 Required Sending Basic Speed Control Output


46 hex 70 Required Receiving Basic Speed Control Input

Assembly Basic Speed Control, Instance Number: 20, type: Output

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0


0 Fault RUN
Reset Forward
1
2 Speed Reference (Low Byte)
3 Speed Reference (High Byte)

Assembly Basic Speed Control, Instance Number: 70, type: Input

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0


0 Running Faulted
Forward
1
2 Speed Actual (Low Byte)
3 Speed Actual (High Byte)

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 109
Communication via EtherNet/IP
4.6 Create generic I/O module

4.6 Create generic I/O module

Overview
For certain controllers, or if you wish to use the SINAMICS profile, you cannot use the EDS file
provided by Siemens. In these cases, you must create a generic I/O module in the control
system for the cyclic communication.

Function description

Procedure
1. In your control, create a generic device with Ethernet/IP functionality.
2. In the control, enter the lengths for the process data for cyclic communication in the new
device which you set in the converter:
r2067[0] (input), r2067[1] (output), e.g.: Standard telegram 2/2
4 ms is supported as the minimum value for RPI (Requested Packet Interval).
3. In the converter, set the same values for IP address, subnet mask, default gateway and name
of the station as in the control.
Configuring communication (Page 94)
You have created a generic I/O module for cyclic communication with the converter.

Further information
You can find a detailed description of how to create a generic I/O module on the Internet:
Generating an EDS file (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/82843076)

Fieldbuses
110 Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG
Communication via EtherNet/IP
4.7 The converter as an Ethernet station

4.7 The converter as an Ethernet station

Integrating a converter into an Ethernet network (assigning an IP address)

Procedure
1. Set p8924 (PN DHCP mode) = 2 or 3
– p8924 = 2
The DHCP server assigns the IP address based on the MAC address of the converter
– p8924 = 3
The DHCP server assigns the IP address based on the device name of the converter
2. Save the settings with p8925 = 2. The next time that the converter switches on, it retrieves
the IP address. After this, you can address the converter as an Ethernet node.

Note
Immediate switchover without restart
The switchover to DHCP is performed immediately and without a restart if the change is
carried out with the EtherNet/IP command "Set Attribute Single" (class F5 hex, attribute 3).
The following options are available:
• Via an EtherNet/IP controller
• Via an EtherNet/IP commissioning tool

You have now integrated the converter into Ethernet

Displays
r8930: Device name of the converter
r8934: Operating mode, PN or DHCP
r8935: MAC address

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 111
Communication via EtherNet/IP
4.7 The converter as an Ethernet station

Additional options of integrating converters into Ethernet


You also have the option of integrating the converter into Ethernet using Proneta or STEP 7,
for example.
Here is the example of the "Edit Ethernet station" screen form from Step 7, which you can use
to make the required settings.

See also
Overview of the manuals (Page 244)
You can find the required settings for the converter as Ethernet node in section "The
converter with PROFINET interface as Ethernet node. (Page 78)".

Fieldbuses
112 Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG
Communication via RS485 5
Table 5- 1 Assignment table - fieldbus systems via RS485

Converter/Control Unit Fieldbus connection for


USS Modbus BACnet P1
RTU MS/TP
G120
• CU230P-2 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
HVAC

• CU230P-2 BT ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓

• CU240B-2 ✓ ✓ --- ---

• CU240E-2 ✓ ✓ --- ---

• CU240E-2 F ✓ ✓ --- ---

• CU250S-2 ✓ ✓ --- ---

G120C
• G120C USS/MB ✓ ✓ --- ---

G110M
• CU240M USS ✓ ✓ --- ---

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 113
Communication via RS485
5.1 Converter with RS485 interface

5.1 Converter with RS485 interface


You can find the connectors and the connector assignments of the RS485 interface in the
following tables.

Table 5- 2 Assignment table

Converter/Control Unit Connection via


X128 X03, in X04, out
(M12) (M12)

G120
• CU230P-2 HVAC x

• CU230P-2 BT x

• CU240B-2 x

• CU240E-2 x

• CU240E-2 F x

• CU250S-2 x

G120C
• G120C USS/MB x

G110M
• CU240M USS x x

Fieldbuses
114 Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG
Communication via RS485
5.1 Converter with RS485 interface

Table 5- 3 Pin assignment

Signal X128 X03, in X04, out


(M12) (M12)

Not assigned 5 1/3 1/3


RS485N, receive and transmit (-) 3 --- ---
RS485N, receive --- 2 ---
RS485N, transmit (-) --- --- 2
RS485P, receive and transmit (+) 2 --- ---
RS485P, receive --- 4 ---
RS485P, transmit (+) --- --- 4
0 V, reference potential 1 5 5
Cable shield 4 --- ---

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 115
Communication via RS485
5.2 Integrating converters into a bus system via the RS485 interface

5.2 Integrating converters into a bus system via the RS485 interface

Connecting to a network via RS485

Connect the converter to the fieldbus


via the RS485 interface.
The RS485 connector has short-circuit
proof, isolated pins.
You must switch-in the bus-
terminating resistor for the first and
last nodes.
You can find the position of the
RS485 connector and the bus termi-
nating resistor in the operating in-
structions for the converter or the
Control Unit.
The precondition for error-free communications is that the first and last station are supplied
with power.
Communications are maintained if you withdraw individual slaves from the bus without
interrupting the cable (this is not possible for converters with a high degree of protection).

Communication with the control, even when the line voltage is switched off
So that communication with the control system in your plant or system continues to function
even when the line voltage is switched off, you must externally supply the converter/Control
Unit with 24 V DC. To do this, use terminals 31 and 32 or connector X01 (X01/X02 with
G115D). You can find additional details in the operating instructions for the converter or the
Control Unit.

Fieldbuses
116 Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG
Communication via RS485
5.3 Communication via USS

5.3 Communication via USS


The USS protocol is a serial data link between a master and up to a maximum of 31 slaves.
A master is, for example:
• A programmable logic controller (e.g. SIMATIC S7-200)
• A PC
The converter is always a slave.
The maximum cable length is:
• 1200 m for a baud rate up to 38400 bit/s and maximum of 32 nodes
• 1000 m for a baud rate of 187500 bit/s and a maximum of 30 nodes
Additional information on how to connect the converter to a USS fieldbus: Integrating
converters into a bus system via the RS485 interface (Page 116).

5.3.1 Basic settings for communication

Overview
Depending on the converter, the following options are available for setting communication
via the USS:
• For all converters with an RS485 interface:
21 "USS Fieldbus"
• For converters with a CU230P-2 HVAC / CU230P-2 BT
108 "BT Mac 8: USS fieldbus"
For additional information, please refer to the operating instructions of your converter.
Overview of the manuals (Page 244).

Procedure with default setting 21 "USS Fieldbus"


Proceed as follows to set communication via USS:
1. Activate communication via the RS485 interface using one of the following options:
– With Startdrive during commissioning in step "Default setting of setpoint/command
sources":
21: USS fieldbus
– With the BOP-2 during basic commissioning under step "MAc PAr P15":
FB USS
– Via the parameter number:
p0015 = 21
2. Set the bus protocol via p2030:
p2030 = 1
3. Set the converter address.

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 117
Communication via RS485
5.3 Communication via USS

4. Make additional changes based on the parameters listed in the following section.
5. If you are working with Startdrive, back up the settings so they are not lost if the power fails.
You have now made the settings for communication via USS.

5.3.1.1 Setting the address

Valid address area: 0 … 31


You have the following options for setting the address:
• Using the address switch on the Control Unit:

Figure 5-1 Address switch with example for bus address 10

The address switch has priority over the other settings.


• Using Startdrive or an operator panel via parameter p2021 (default setting: p2021 = 0)
it is only possible to change p2021 if an invalid address is set in the address switch.
If you are working with Startdrive, back up the settings so they are not lost if the power
fails.
You can find the position of the address switch in the operating instructions for the
converter.
Manuals and technical support (Page 244)

Activating the changed bus address

Procedure
1. Set the address as described above.
2. Switch off the converter power supply.
3. Wait until all LEDs on the converter are dark.
4. Switch on the converter power supply again.
Your settings become effective after switching on.
You have now set the bus address.

Fieldbuses
118 Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG
Communication via RS485
5.3 Communication via USS

5.3.1.2 Parameters to set communication via USS

Fieldbus protocol selection p2030 = 1 (USS)

Baud rate p2020 = 8, 38400 bit/s


Setting range: 2400 bit/s … 187500 bit/s

Fieldbus analog outputs p0791[0 … 1]


Parameter to interconnect the analog outputs for control via the fieldbus

Fieldbus interface USS PZD number p2022 = 2


Setting the number of 16-bit words in the PZD part of the USS telegram
Setting range: 0… 8 (0 … 8 words)

Fieldbus interface USS PKW number, p2023 = 127


Setting the number of 16-bit words in the PKW part of the USS telegram
Setting range:
• 0, 3, 4: fixed length with 0, 3 or 4 words
• 127: variable lengths

Fieldbus error statistics r2029


Displaying receive errors at the fieldbus interface

Fieldbus monitoring time p2040 = 100 ms


Setting range: 0 ms … 1999999 ms
The more slaves that are connected in the network, the longer the fieldbus monitoring time
must be.
If process data is not transferred within one cycle of the fieldbus monitoring time, then the
converter shuts down with fault F01910.
p2040 = 0 ⇒ bus monitoring deactivated.

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 119
Communication via RS485
5.3 Communication via USS

5.3.2 Telegram structure

Overview
A USS telegram comprises a series of elements with a defined sequence. Each element
contains 11 bits.

Figure 5-2 Structure of a USS telegram

Telegram part Description


Start delay / re- There is always a start / response delay between two telegrams.
sponse delay
Telegram monitoring (Page 131)
STX An ASCII character (02 hex) indicates the beginning of the message.
LGE The telegram length "LGE" is calculated as follows:
LGE = user data (n bytes) + ADR (1 byte) + BCC (1 byte)
ADR

• Bit 7 = 0: Normal data exchange.


Bit 7 =1, to transfer telegrams that require a net data structure different
from the device profile.
• Bit 6 = 0: Normal data exchange.
Bit 6 = 1: Testing the bus connection: The converter returns the telegram
unchanged to the master.
• Bit 5 = 0: Normal data exchange.
(Bit 5 = 1: Not supported in the converter.)
• Bits 0 … 4: Address of the converter.
User data Specify user data of telegram (Page 121).
BCC Checksum (exclusive or) across all telegram bytes – with the exception of BCC.

Fieldbuses
120 Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG
Communication via RS485
5.3 Communication via USS

5.3.3 Specify user data of telegram

Overview
The user data of the telegram consist of the following elements:
• Parameter channel (PIV) for writing and reading parameter values
• Process data (PZD) for controlling the drive

Figure 5-3 USS telegram - user data structure

Function description

Parameter channel
You specify the length of the parameter channel in parameter p2023:
• p2023 = 0
With this setting, no parameter values are transferred.
• p2023 = 3
You can select this setting if you only want to read or write 16-bit data or alarm signals.
• p2023 = 4:
If you want to read or write 32-bit values (for example indexed parameters or bit
parameters, e.g. r0722.2), then this setting is required. In this case, the send or receive
telegram always contains four words, even if only three would be required. The values are
right-justified in the 4th word.
• p2023 = 127:
If you set p2023 = 127 (variable length), the send and response telegrams are exactly as
long as the task requires.

Process data
Parameter p2022 defines the length for the process data. You can transfer up to eight
process data items in one telegram (p2022 = 0 … 8). For p2022 = 0, no process data is
transferred.

Parameters

Parameter Description Factory setting


p2022 Fieldbus interface USS PZD number 2
p2023 Fieldbus interface USS PKW number 127

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 121
Communication via RS485
5.3 Communication via USS

5.3.4 USS parameter channel

Structure of the parameter channel


Depending on the setting in p2023, the parameter channel has a fixed length of three or four
words, or a variable length, depending on the length of the data to be transferred.
1. and 2nd word contain the parameter number and index as well as the type of job (read or
write). The other words of the parameter channel contain parameter contents. The
parameter contents can be 8-bit values, 16-bit values (such as baud rate) or 32-bit values
(e.g. CO parameters). The parameter contents are entered right justified in the word with the
highest number. Words that are not required are assigned 0.
Bit 11 in the 1st word is reserved and is always assigned 0.
The diagram shows a parameter channel that is four words long.

You can find examples of telegrams at the end of this section.

Function description

AK: Request and response ID

Table 5- 4 Request identifiers, control → converter

AK Description Response identifi-


er
positive nega-
tive
0 No request 0 7/8
1 Request parameter value 1/2 7/8
2 Change parameter value (word) 1 7/8
3 Change parameter value (double word) 2 7/8
4 Request descriptive element 1) 3 7/8
6 2) Request parameter value (field) 1) 4/5 7/8
7 2) Change parameter value (field, word) 1) 4 7/8
8 2) Change parameter value (field, double word) 1) 5 7/8
9 Request number of field elements 6 7/8
1) The required element of the parameter is specified in IND (2nd word).
2) The following request IDs are identical: 1 ≡ 6, 2 ≡ 7 and 3 ≡ 8.
We recommend that you use identifiers 6, 7 and 8.

Fieldbuses
122 Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG
Communication via RS485
5.3 Communication via USS

Table 5- 5 Response identifiers, converter → control

AK Description
0 No response
1 Transfer parameter value (word)
2 Transfer parameter value (double word)
3 Transfer descriptive element 1)
4 Transfer parameter value (field, word) 2)
5 Transfer parameter value (field, double word) 2)
6 Transfer number of field elements
7 Converter cannot process the request.
In the most significant word of the parameter channel, the converter sends an error number
to the control, refer to the following table.
8 No master controller status / no authorization to change parameters of the parameter chan-
nel interface
1) The required element of the parameter is specified in IND (2nd word).
2) The required element of the indexed parameter is specified in IND (2nd word).

Table 5- 6 Error numbers for response identifier 7

No. Description
00 hex Illegal parameter number (access to a parameter that does not exist)
01 hex Parameter value cannot be changed (change request for a parameter value that cannot
be changed)
02 hex Lower or upper value limit exceeded (change request with a value outside the value
limits)
03 hex Incorrect subindex (access to a subindex that does not exist)
04 hex No array (access with a subindex to non-indexed parameters)
05 hex Incorrect data type (change request with a value that does not match the data type of the
parameter)
06 hex Setting not permitted, only resetting (change request with a value not equal to 0 with-
out permission)
07 hex Descriptive element cannot be changed (change request to a descriptive element error
value that cannot be changed)
0B hex No master control (change request but with no master control, see also p0927.)
0C hex Keyword missing
11 hex Request cannot be executed due to the operating state (access is not possible for tem-
porary reasons that are not specified)
14 hex Inadmissible value (change request with a value that is within the limits but which is
illegal for other permanent reasons, i.e. a parameter with defined individual values)
65 hex Parameter number is currently deactivated (depending on the mode of the converter)
66 hex Channel width is insufficient (communication channel is too small for response)
68 hex Illegal parameter value (parameter can only assume certain values)
6A hex Request not included / task is not supported (the valid request identifications can be
found in table "Request identifications controller → converter")
6B hex No change access for a controller that is enabled. (The operating state of the conerter
prevents a parameter change)
86 hex Write access only for commissioning (p0010 = 15) (operating state of the converter
prevents a parameter change)

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 123
Communication via RS485
5.3 Communication via USS

No. Description
87 hex Know-how protection active, access locked
C8 hex Change request below the currently valid limit (change request to a value that lies with-
in the "absolute" limits, but is however below the currently valid lower limit)
C9 hex Change request above the currently valid limit (example: a parameter value is too large
for the converter power)
CC hex Change request not permitted (change is not permitted as the access code is not availa-
ble)

PNU (parameter number) and page index

Parameter number PNU Page index


0000 … 1999 0000 … 1999 0 hex
2000 … 3999 0000 … 1999 80 hex
6000 … 7999 0000 … 1999 90 hex
8000 … 9999 0000 … 1999 20 hex
10000 … 11999 0000 … 1999 A0 hex
20000 … 21999 0000 … 1999 50 hex
29000 … 29999 0000 … 1999 70 hex
30000 … 31999 0000 … 1999 F0 hex
60000 … 61999 0000 … 1999 74 hex

Subindex
For indexed parameters, the parameter index is located in subindex as hexadecimal value.

PWE: Parameter value or connector


Parameter values or connectors can be located in the PWE.

Table 5- 7 Parameter value or connector

PWE 1 PWE 2
Parameter value Bit 15 … 0 Bit 15 … 8 Bit 7 … 0
0 0 8-bit value
0 16-bit value
32-bit value
Connector Bit 15 … 0 Bit 15 … 10 Bit 9 … 0
Number of the connector 3F hex The index or bit field
number of the con-
nector

Fieldbuses
124 Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG
Communication via RS485
5.3 Communication via USS

Examples

Read request: Read out serial number of the Power Module (p7841[2])
To obtain the value of the indexed parameter p7841, you must fill the telegram of the
parameter channel with the following data:
• PKE, Bit 12 … 15 (AK): = 6 (request parameter value (field))
• PKE, Bit 0 … 10 (PNU): = 1841 (parameter number without offset)
Parameter number = PNU + offset (page index)
(7841 = 1841 + 6000)
• IND, bit 8 … 15 (subindex): = 2 (index of parameter)
• IND, bit 0 … 7 (page index): = 90 hex (offset 6000 corresponds to 90 hex)
• Because you want to read the parameter value, words 3 and 4 in the parameter channel
for requesting the parameter value are irrelevant. They should be assigned a value of 0,
for example.

Figure 5-4 Telegram for a read request from p7841[2]

Parameter number

Parameter numbers < 2000 PNU = parameter number.


Write the parameter number into the PNU (PKE bit 10 ... 0).
Parameter numbers ≥ 2000 PNU = parameter number - offset.
Write the parameter number minus the offset into the PNU
(PKE bit 10 … 0).
Write the offset in the page index (IND bit 15 … 8).

Table 5- 8 Offset and page index of the parameter numbers

Parameter num- Offset Page index


ber
Hex Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8
0000 … 1999 0 0 hex 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2000 … 3999 2000 80 hex 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6000 … 7999 6000 90 hex 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0
8000 … 9999 8000 20 hex 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0
10000 … 11999 10000 A0 hex 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0
20000 … 21999 20000 50 hex 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0
29000 … 29999 28000 70 hex 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0
30000 … 31999 30000 F0 hex 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0
60000 … 61999 60000 74 hex 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 0

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 125
Communication via RS485
5.3 Communication via USS

Indexed parameters
For indexed parameters, you must write the index as hex value into the subindex (IND
bit 7 … 0).

Parameter contents
Parameter contents can be parameter values or connector parameters. You require two
words for connector parameters. You can find more information on interconnecting
connector parameters in the operating instructions of the converter in the section
"Interconnecting signals in the converter".

Enter the parameter value in the parameter channel right-justified as follows:


• 8-bit values: Low word, bits bits 8 … 15 are zero.
0 … 7,
• 16-bit values: Low word, bits 0 … 15,
• 32-bit values: Low word and high word
Enter a connector parameter right-justified as follows:
• Number of the connector parameter: High word
• Drive object of the connector parameter: Low word, bits 10 … 15
• The index or bit field number of the connector parameter: Low word, bits 0 … 9

5.3.4.1 Telegram examples, length of the parameter channel = 4

Read request: Read out serial number of the Power Module (p7841[2])
To obtain the value of the indexed parameter p7841, you must fill the telegram of the
parameter channel with the following data:
• PKE, bit 12 … 15 (AK): = 6 (request parameter value (field))
• PKE, bit 0 … 10 (PNU): = 1841 (parameter number without offset)
Parameter number = PNU + offset (page index)
(7841 = 1841 + 6000)
• IND, bit 8 … 15 (page index): = 90 hex (offset 6000 corresponds to 90 hex)
• IND, bit 0 … 7 (subindex): = 2 (index of parameter)
• Because you want to read the parameter value, words 3 and 4 in the parameter channel
for requesting the parameter value are irrelevant. They should be assigned a value of 0,
for example.

Figure 5-5 Telegram for a read request from p7841[2]

Fieldbuses
126 Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG
Communication via RS485
5.3 Communication via USS

Write request: Changing the automatic restart mode (p1210)


Parameter p1210 defines the automatic restart mode:
• PKE, bit 12 … 15 (AK): = 7 (change parameter value (field, word))
• PKE, bit 0 … 10 (PNU): = 4BA hex (1210 = 4BA hex, no offset, as 1210 < 1999)
• IND, bit 8 … 15 (page index): = 0 hex (offset 0 corresponds to 0 hex)
• IND, bit 0 … 7 (subindex): = 0 hex (parameter is not indexed)
• PWE1, bit 0 … 15: = 0 hex
• PWE2, bit 0 … 15: = 1A hex (26 = 1A hex)

Figure 5-6 Telegram, to activate the automatic restart with p1210 = 26

Write request: Assign digital input 2 with the function ON/OFF1 (p0840[1] = 722.2)
In order to link digital input 2 with ON/OFF1, you must assign parameter p0840[1] (source,
ON/OFF1) the value 722.2 (DI 2). To do this, you must fill the telegram of the parameter
channel as follows:
• PKE, bit 12 … 15 (AK): = 7 hex (change parameter value (field, word))
• PKE, bit 0 … 10 (PNU): = 348 hex (840 = 348 hex, no offset, as 840 < 1999)
• IND, bit 8 … 15 (page index): = 0 hex (offset 0 corresponds to 0 hex)
• IND, bit 0 … 7 (subindex): = 1 hex (command data set CDS1 = index1)
• PWE1, bit 0 … 15: = 2D2 hex (722 = 2D2 hex)
• PWE2, bit 10 … 15: = 3f hex (drive object - for SINAMICS G120 always 63 = 3f hex)
• PWE2, bit 0 … 9: = 2 hex (index or bit number of the parameter: DI 2 = r0722.2)

Figure 5-7 Telegram, to assign DI 2 with ON/OFF1

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 127
Communication via RS485
5.3 Communication via USS

5.3.5 USS process data channel (PZD)

Function description
The process data channel (PZD) contains the following data depending on the transmission
direction:
• Control words and setpoints for the slave
• Status words and actual values for the master.

Figure 5-8 Process data channel

The first two words are:


• Control 1 (STW1) and main setpoint (HSW)
• Status word 1 (ZSW1) and main actual value (HIW)
If p2022 is greater than or equal to 4, then the converter receives the additional control word
(STW2).

Control word 1 (STW1)

Bit Significance Explanation Signal inter-


connection
in the con-
verter
0 0 = OFF1 The motor brakes with the ramp-down time p1121 of p0840[0] =
the ramp-function generator. The converter switches r2090.0
off the motor at standstill.
0 → 1 = ON The converter goes into the "ready" state. If, in addi-
tion bit 3 = 1, then the converter switches on the
motor.
1 0 = OFF2 Switch off the motor immediately, the motor then p0844[0] =
coasts down to a standstill. r2090.1
1 = No OFF2 The motor can be switched on (ON command).
2 0 = Quick stop (OFF3) Quick stop: The motor brakes to a standstill with the p0848[0] =
OFF3 ramp-down time p1135. r2090.2
1 = No quick stop The motor can be switched on (ON command).
(OFF3)
3 0 = Inhibit operation Immediately switch-off motor (cancel pulses). p0852[0] =
1 = Enable operation Switch-on motor (pulses can be enabled). r2090.3
4 0 = Disable RFG The converter immediately sets its ramp-function p1140[0] =
generator output to 0. r2090.4
1 = Do not disable RFG The ramp-function generator can be enabled.

Fieldbuses
128 Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG
Communication via RS485
5.3 Communication via USS

Bit Significance Explanation Signal inter-


connection
in the con-
verter
5 0 = Stop RFG The output of the ramp-function generator stops at p1141[0] =
the actual value. r2090.5
1 = Enable RFG The output of the ramp-function generator follows
the setpoint.
6 0 = Inhibit setpoint The converter brakes the motor with the ramp-down p1142[0] =
time p1121 of the ramp-function generator. r2090.6
1 = Enable setpoint Motor accelerates to the setpoint with the ramp-up
time p1120.
7 0 → 1 = Acknowledge Acknowledge fault. If the ON command is still active, p2103[0] =
faults the converter switches to the "switching on inhibited" r2090.7
state.
8, 9 Reserved
10 0 = No control via PLC Converter ignores the process data from the fieldbus. p0854[0] =
1 = Control via PLC Control via fieldbus, converter accepts the process r2090.10
data from the fieldbus.
11 1 = Direction reversal Invert setpoint in the converter. p1113[0] =
r2090.11
12 Reserved
13 1 = MOP up Increase the setpoint saved in the motorized potenti- p1035[0] =
ometer. r2090.13
14 1 = MOP down Reduce the setpoint saved in the motorized potenti- p1036[0] =
ometer. r2090.14
15 Reserved

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 129
Communication via RS485
5.3 Communication via USS

Status word 1 (ZSW1)

Bit Significance Remarks Signal inter-


connection
in the con-
verter
0 1 = Ready for switching Power supply switched on; electronics initialized; p2080[0] =
on pulses locked. r0899.0
1 1 = Ready Motor is switched on (ON/OFF1 = 1), no fault is ac- p2080[1] =
tive. With the command "Enable operation" (STW1.3), r0899.1
the converter switches on the motor.
2 1 = Operation enabled Motor follows setpoint. See control word 1, bit 3. p2080[2] =
r0899.2
3 1 = Fault active The converter has a fault. Acknowledge fault using p2080[3] =
STW1.7. r2139.3
4 1 = OFF2 inactive Coast down to standstill is not active. p2080[4] =
r0899.4
5 1 = OFF3 inactive Quick stop is not active. p2080[5] =
r0899.5
6 1 = Switching on inhib- It is only possible to switch on the motor after an p2080[6] =
ited active OFF1 followed by ON. r0899.6
7 1 = Alarm active Motor remains switched on; no acknowledgement is p2080[7] =
necessary. r2139.7
8 1 = Speed deviation Setpoint / actual value deviation within the tolerance p2080[8] =
within the tolerance range. r2197.7
range
9 1 = Master control re- The automation system is requested to accept the p2080[9] =
quested converter control. r0899.9
10 1 = Comparison speed Speed is greater than or equal to the corresponding p2080[10] =
reached or exceeded maximum speed. r2199.1
11 1 = Torque limit not Fallen below comparison value for current or torque. p2080[11] =
reached r0056.13 /
r1407.7
12 Reserved p2080[12] =
r0899.12
13 0 = Alarm, motor over- -- p2080[13] =
temperature r2135.14
14 1 = Motor rotates Internal converter actual value > 0. p2080[14] =
clockwise r2197.3
0 = Motor rotates coun- Internal converter actual value < 0.
ter-clockwise
15 0 = Alarm, converter p2080[15] =
thermal overload r2135.15

Fieldbuses
130 Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG
Communication via RS485
5.3 Communication via USS

5.3.6 Telegram monitoring

Function description
You require the telegram runtimes in order to set the telegram monitoring. The character
runtime is the basis of the telegram runtime:

Table 5- 9 Character runtime

Baud rate in bit/s Transmission time per bit Character run time (= 11 bits)
9600 104.170 µs 1.146 ms
19200 52.084 µs 0.573 ms
38400 26.042 µs 0.286 ms
57600 17.361 µs 0.191 ms
115200 8.681 µs 0.095 ms

The telegram runtime is longer than just purely adding all of the character runtimes
(=residual runtime). You must also take into consideration the character delay time between
the individual characters of the telegram.

Figure 5-9 Telegram runtime as the sum of the residual runtime and character delay times

The total telegram runtime is always less than 150% of the pure residual runtime.
Before each request telegram, the master must maintain the start delay. The start delay must
be > 2 × character runtime.
The slave only responds after the response delay has expired.

Figure 5-10 Start delay and response delay

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 131
Communication via RS485
5.3 Communication via USS

Table 5- 10 Start delay

Baud rate in bit/s Transmission time per character (= 11 bits) Min. start delay
9600 1.146 ms > 2.291 ms
19200 0.573 ms > 1.146 ms
38400 0.286 ms > 0.573 ms
57600 0.191 ms > 0.382 ms
115200 0.095 ms > 0.191 ms

The character delay time must be shorter than the start delay.

Telegram monitoring of the master


With your USS master, we recommend that the following times are monitored:
• Response delay:
Response time of the slave to a request from the master
The response delay must be < 20 ms, but longer than the start delay
• Telegram runtime:
Transmission time of the response telegram sent from the slave

Telegram monitoring of the converter


The converter monitors the time between two requests of the master. Parameter p2040
defines the permissible time in ms. If a time p2040 ≠ 0 is exceeded, then the converter
interprets this as telegram failure and responds with fault F01910.
150% of the residual runtime is the guide value for the setting of p2040, i.e. the telegram
runtime without taking into account the character delay times.
For communication via USS, the converter checks bit 10 of the received control word 1. If the
bit is not set when the motor is switched on ("Operation"), the converter responds with fault
F07220.

Parameters

Parameter Description Factory setting


p2040 Fieldbus interface monitoring time 1 000 ms

Fieldbuses
132 Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG
Communication via RS485
5.4 Communication using Modbus RTU

5.4 Communication using Modbus RTU

Overview of communication using Modbus


The Modbus protocol is a communication protocol based on a client/server architecture.
Selected parameters and process data are exchanged in a cyclic access via the Modbus
register.
Modbus offers three transmission modes:
• Modbus ASCII - via a serial interface
data in the ASCII code. The data throughput is lower compared to RTU.
• Modbus RTU - via a serial interface
data in the binary format. The data throughput is greater than in ASCII code.
• Modbus TCP - via Ethernet
Data are transferred as TCP/IP packages TCP port 502 is reserved for Modbus TCP.

General information about communication using Modbus RTU


Communication using Modbus RTU takes place over the RS485 interface with a maximum of
247 slaves.
• The maximum cable length is 1200 m.
• To polarize the receive and transmit lines, there are two 100 kΩ resistors, which you can
switch in or switch out using the DIP switch next to the fieldbus interface.

Note
It is not permitted to change over the units
The "Unit switchover" function – for details see the operating instructions of the Control Unit
– is not permissible with this bus system!

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 133
Communication via RS485
5.4 Communication using Modbus RTU

5.4.1 Basic settings for communication

Overview
Depending on the converter, the following options are available for setting communication
via the Modbus RTU:
• For all converters with an RS485 interface:
21 "USS Fieldbus"
• For converters with a CU230P-2 HVAC / CU230P-2 BT
109 "BT Mac 9: Modbus RTU Fieldbus"
For additional information, please refer to the operating instructions of your converter.
Overview of the manuals (Page 244).

Procedure with default setting 21 "USS Fieldbus"


Proceed as follows to set communication via Modbus RTU:
1. Activate communication via the RS485 interface using one of the following options:
– With Startdrive during commissioning step "Default setting of setpoint/command
sources":
21: USS fieldbus
– With the BOP-2 during the basic commissioning under step "MAc PAr P15":
FB USS
– Via parameter number:
p0015 = 21
2. Set the bus protocol via p2030:
p2030 = 2
3. Set the converter address.
4. Make additional changes based on the parameters listed in the following section.
5. If you are working with Startdrive, back up the settings so they are not lost if the power fails.
You have now made the settings for communication via Modbus.

Fieldbuses
134 Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG
Communication via RS485
5.4 Communication using Modbus RTU

5.4.1.1 Setting the address

Valid address area: 1 … 247


You have the following options for setting the address:
• Using the address switch on the Control Unit from 1 … 127:

Figure 5-11 Address switch with example for bus address 10

The address switch has priority over the other settings.


• Using Startdrive or an operator panel via parameter p2021 from 1 … 247 (default setting:
p2021 = 1)
Setting via p2021 is only possible if address 0 is set in the address switch.
If you are working with Startdrive, back up the settings so they are not lost if the power
fails.
You can find the position of the address switch in the operating instructions for the
converter.
Manuals and technical support (Page 244)

Activating the changed bus address

Procedure
1. Set the address as described above.
2. Switch off the converter power supply.
3. Wait until all LEDs on the converter are dark.
4. Switch on the converter power supply again.
Your settings become effective after switching on.
You have now set the bus address.

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 135
Communication via RS485
5.4 Communication using Modbus RTU

5.4.1.2 Parameters for setting communication via Modbus RTU

General settings

Fieldbus protocol selection p2030 = 2 (Modbus RTU)

Baud rate p2020 = 7, 19200 bit/s


Setting range: 4800 bit/s … 187500 bit/s

Parity
In the factory, the converter is set for controllers with "parity even". You can adapt the parity
at your controller using p2031:
• p2031 = 0: No parity, 1 stop bit or 2 stop bits
• p2031 = 1: Odd parity, 1 stop bit
• p2031 = 2: Even parity, 1 stop bit
Modbus timing p2024[0 … 2]
• p2024[0]: Maximum slave telegram processing time:
The time after which the slave must have sent a response to the master. 0 ms …
10000 ms, factory setting = 6000 ms.
• p2024[1]: Character delay time:
Character delay time: Maximum permissible time between the individual characters in the
Modbus frame. (Modbus standard processing time for 1.5 bytes).
• p2024 [2]: Inter-telegram delay:
maximum permissible time between Modbus telegrams. (Modbus standard processing
time for 3.5 bytes).
Values for p2024 [1] and p2024 [2]
Table 5-11 Baud rates, transmission times, and delays (Page 139).

Fieldbus monitoring time p2040 = 1000 ms


Setting range: 0 ms … 1999999 ms
The more slaves that are connected in the network, the longer the fieldbus monitoring time
must be.
If process data is not transferred within one cycle of the fieldbus monitoring time, then the
converter shuts down with fault F01910.
p2040 = 0 ⇒ bus monitoring deactivated.

Fieldbus error statistics r2029


Displaying receive errors at the fieldbus interface

Fieldbuses
136 Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG
Communication via RS485
5.4 Communication using Modbus RTU

Interconnecting analog outputs


If you set communication via Modbus (p2030 = 2), then the analog outputs of the converter
are internally interconnected with the fieldbus analog outputs:
• p0771[0] = 791[0]
• p0771[1] = 791[1].
The values for p0791[0] and p0791[1] are written via registers 40523 and 40524.
Interconnections between parameter p0791 and other sources are rejected.
This means that the control outputs system-specific values via the analog outputs of the
converter.
However, if you still wish to display a converter-specific value, you must adapt the
appropriate wiring.

Example
• AO 0 should display the value written via the control with register 40523. In this particular
case, no other settings are required in the converter.
• AO 1 should display the smoothed current actual value. To do this, you must set
p0771[1] = 27 (r0027 smoothed current actual value).
In this case, a write access via register 40524 to p0791[1] results in a fault message in the
control.

Note
Reset to the factory setting for Modbus
If you have set communication via Modbus (p2030 = 2), when restoring the factory settings,
the analog outputs are again interconnected with p0771[0] = 791[0] and p0771[1] = 791[1].

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 137
Communication via RS485
5.4 Communication using Modbus RTU

5.4.2 Modbus RTU telegram

Description
For Modbus, there is precisely one master and up to 247 slaves. The master always starts the
communication. Slaves send data when requested to do so by the master. Slave-to-slave
communication is not possible. The converter always operates as slave.
The following figure shows the structure of a Modbus RTU telegram.

Figure 5-12 Modbus with delay times

The data area of the telegram is structured according to the mapping tables.

Fieldbuses
138 Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG
Communication via RS485
5.4 Communication using Modbus RTU

5.4.3 Baud rates and mapping tables

Permissible baud rates and telegram delay


The Modbus RTU telegram requires pauses for the following situations:
• for the start identifier
• for separating the individual frames
• for the end identifier
Minimum duration: Processing time for 3.5 bytes (can be set via p2024[2]).
A character delay time is also permitted between the individual bytes of a frame. Maximum
duration: Processing time for 1.5 bytes (can be set via p2024[1]).

Table 5- 11 Baud rates, transmission times, and delays

Baud rate in bit/s (p2020) Transmission time Minimum pause be- Maximum pause
per character (11 tween two telegrams between two bytes
bits) (p2024[2]) (p2024[1])
4800 2.292 ms ≥ 8.021 ms ≤ 3.438 ms
9600 1.146 ms ≥ 4.010 ms ≤ 1.719 ms
19200 (factory setting) 0.573 ms ≥ 1.75 ms ≤ 0.859 ms
38400 0.286 ms ≥ 1.75 ms ≤ 0.75 ms
57600 0.191 ms ≥ 1.75 ms ≤ 0.556 ms
76800 0.143 ms ≥ 1.75 ms ≤ 0.417 ms
93750 0.117 ms ≥ 1.75 ms ≤ 0.341 ms
115200 0.095 ms ≥ 1.75 ms ≤ 0.278 ms
187500 0.059 ms ≥ 1.75 ms ≤ 0.171 ms

Note
The factory setting for p2024[1] and p2024[2] is 0. The converter defines the particular
values depending on the protocol selection (p2030) or the baud rate.

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 139
Communication via RS485
5.4 Communication using Modbus RTU

Modbus register
The converter supports the subsequently listed registers. Error "Exception Code" is output if
an attempt is made to access other registers.

Note
Read and write access to converter data
R: read via FC03; W: write via FC06; R/W: read via FC03 or write via FC06

Table 5- 12 Assigning the Modbus registers to the process data

Register Description Access Scaling Data / parameter


40100 Control word R/W 1 Process data 1
40101 Main setpoint R/W 1 Process data 2
40110 Status word R 1 Process data 1
40111 Main actual value R 1 Process data 2

Fieldbuses
140 Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG
Communication via RS485
5.4 Communication using Modbus RTU

5.4.4 Mapping tables - converter data

Table 5- 13 Assigning the Modbus registers to the parameters - inputs and outputs

Register Description Ac- Unit Scaling ON/OFF Data / parameter


cess text/value range
Digital outputs
40200 DO 0 R/W -- 1 HIGH LOW p0730, r747.0, p748.0
40201 DO 1 R/W -- 1 HIGH LOW p0731, r747.1, p748.1
40202 DO 2 R/W -- 1 HIGH LOW p0732, r747.2, p748.2
Analog outputs
40220 AO 0 R % 100 -100.0 … 100.0 r0774.0
40221 AO 1 R % 100 -100.0 … 100.0 r0774.1
40222 AO 2 R % 100 -100.0 … 100.0 r0774.2
40523 AO 0 R/W % 100 -199.99 … 199.99 p0791.0
40524 AO 1 R/W % 100 -199.99 … 199.99 p0791.1
40525 AO 2 R/W % 100 -199.99 … 199.99 p0791.2
Digital inputs
40240 DI 0 R -- 1 HIGH LOW r0722.0
40241 DI 1 R -- 1 HIGH LOW r0722.1
40242 DI 2 R -- 1 HIGH LOW r0722.2
40243 DI 3 R -- 1 HIGH LOW r0722.3
40244 DI 4 R -- 1 HIGH LOW r0722.4
40245 DI 5 R -- 1 HIGH LOW r0722.5
Analog inputs
40260 AI 0 R % 100 -300.0 … 300.0 r0755 [0]
40261 AI 1 R % 100 -300.0 … 300.0 r0755 [1]
40262 AI 2 R % 100 -300.0 … 300.0 r0755 [2]
40263 AI 3 R % 100 -300.0 … 300.0 r0755 [3]

Table 5- 14 Assigning the Modbus registers to the parameters - converter data

Register Description Ac- Unit Scaling ON/OFF Data / parameter


cess text/value range
40300 Powerstack number R -- 1 0 … 32767 r0200
40301 Converter firmware R -- 1 e.g. 470 r0018 / 10000
40320 Rated power R kW 100 0 … 327.67 r0206
40321 Current limit R/W A 10 10.0 … 400.0 p0640
40322 Ramp-up time R/W s 100 0.00 … 650.0 p1120
40323 Ramp-down time R/W s 100 0.00 … 650.0 p1121
40324 Reference speed R/W RPM 1 6 … 32767 p2000
Converter diagnostics
40340 Speed setpoint R RPM 1 -16250 … 16250 r0020
40341 Actual speed value R RPM 1 -16250 … 16250 r0022
40342 Output frequency R Hz 100 - 327.68 … 327.67 r0024
40343 Output voltage R V 1 0 … 32767 r0025

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 141
Communication via RS485
5.4 Communication using Modbus RTU

Register Description Ac- Unit Scaling ON/OFF Data / parameter


cess text/value range
40344 DC link voltage R V 1 0 … 32767 r0026
40345 Current actual value R A 100 0 … 163.83 r0027
40346 Actual torque value R Nm 100 - 325.00 … 325.00 r0031
40347 Actual active power R kW 100 0 … 327.67 r0032
40348 Energy consumption R kWh 1 0 … 32767 r0039
40349 Control priority R -- 1 HAND AUTO r0807

Table 5- 15 Assigning the Modbus registers to the parameters - fault diagnostics

Regis- Description Ac- Unit Scaling ON/OFF Data / parameter


ter cess text/value range
40400 Failure number, index 0 R -- 1 0 … 32767 r0947 [0]
40401 Failure number, index 1 R -- 1 0 … 32767 r0947 [1]
40402 Failure number, index 2 R -- 1 0 … 32767 r0947 [2]
40403 Fault number, index 3 R -- 1 0 … 32767 r0947 [3]
40404 Fault number, index 4 R -- 1 0 … 32767 r0947 [4]
40405 Fault number, index 5 R -- 1 0 … 32767 r0947 [5]
40406 Fault number, index 6 R -- 1 0 … 32767 r0947 [6]
40407 Fault number, index 7 R -- 1 0 … 32767 r0947 [7]
40408 Alarm number R -- 1 0 … 32767 r2110 [0]
40409 Actual alarm code R -- 1 0 … 32767 r2132
40499 PRM ERROR code R -- 1 0 … 255 --

Table 5- 16 Assigning the Modbus registers to the parameters - technology controller

Regis- Description Ac- Unit Scaling ON/OFF Data / parameter


ter cess text/value range
40500 Technology controller enable R/W -- 1 0…1 p2200, r2349.0
40501 Technology controller MOP R/W % 100 -200.0 … 200.0 p2240
Technology controller adjustment
40510 Time constant for actual value filters of R/W -- 100 0.00 … 60.0 p2265
the technology controller
40511 Scaling factor for actual value of the R/W % 100 0.00 … 500.00 p2269
technology controller
40512 Proportional amplification of the tech- R/W -- 1000 0.000 … 65.000 p2280
nology controller
40513 Integral time of the technology control- R/W s 1 0 … 60 p2285
ler
40514 Time constant D-component of the R/W -- 1 0 … 60 p2274
technology controller
40515 Max. limit of technology controller R/W % 100 -200.0 … 200.0 p2291
40516 Min. limit technology controller R/W % 100 -200.0 … 200.0 p2292

Fieldbuses
142 Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG
Communication via RS485
5.4 Communication using Modbus RTU

Table 5- 17 Assigning the Modbus registers to the parameters - PID diagnostics

Regis- Description Ac- Unit Scaling ON/OFF Data / parameter


ter cess text/value range
40520 Effective setpoint acc. to internal tech- R % 100 -100.0 … 100.0 r2250
nology controller MOP ramp-function
generator
40521 Actual value of technology controller R % 100 -100.0 … 100.0 r2266
after filter
40522 Output signal technology controller R % 100 -100.0 … 100.0 r2294

Table 5- 18 Modbus registers for communication via DS47

Regis- Description Ac- Unit Scaling Data / parameter


ter cess
40601 DS47 Control R/W -- -- --
40602 DS47 header R/W -- -- --
40603 DS47 data 1 R/W -- -- --
… … …
40722 DS47 data 120 R/W -- -- --

Table 5- 19 Modbus registers for multi-pump control

Register Last Description Ac- Unit Scaling ON/OFF text/value Data / parameter
register cess range
40800 Status word R -- 1 0 … 65535 p29529
40801 Motor index speed control R -- 1 0…3 p29538
40802 Status word, service mode R -- 1 0 … 65535 p29544
40804 40805 Motor 1 operating hours R/W h 10 0 … 429496729.5 p29530[0]
40806 40807 Motor 2 operating hours R/W h 10 0 … 429496729.5 p29530[1]
40808 40809 Motor 3 operating hours R/W h 10 0 … 429496729.5 p29530[2]
40810 40811 Motor 4 operating hours R/W h 10 0 … 429496729.5 p29530[3]

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 143
Communication via RS485
5.4 Communication using Modbus RTU

5.4.5 Acyclic communication via Modbus RTU


Acyclic communication or general parameter access is realized using the Modbus registers
40601 … 40722.
Acyclic communication is controlled using 40601. 40602 contains the function code (always
= 47 = 2F hex) and the number of the following user data. User data are contained in
registers 40603 … 40722.

Overview of acyclic communication

Value in the register Explanation


40601 40602 40603 … 40722
0 47 … … Write values for acyclic access
1 47 Request Request data Activate acyclic access
length
[bytes]
2 47 Response Response data Response for a successful request
length
[bytes]
2 47 0 Error code Response for an erronous request

Error codes
1 hex: Invalid Length (invalid length)
2 hex: Invalid State (in the current converter state, this action is not permitted)
3 hex: Invalid function code (FC ≠ 2F hex)
4 hex: Response not ready (the response has still not been issued)
5 hex: Internal Error (general system error)
Incorrect access operations to parameters via data set 47 are logged in registers
40603 … 40722.

Fieldbuses
144 Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG
Communication via RS485
5.4 Communication using Modbus RTU

5.4.6 Write and read access using function codes

Basic structure of read and write access using function codes

Function codes used


For data exchange between the master and slave, predefined function codes are used for
communication via Modbus.
The converter uses the following Modbus function codes:
• FC 03: Holding register to read data from the converter
• FC 06: Write single register to write to individual register
• FC 16: Write to multiple registers to write to several registers

Structure of a read request via Modbus function code 03 (FC 03)


Any valid register address is permitted as the start address.
Via FC 03, the control can address more than one register with one request. The number of
addressed registers is contained in bytes 4 and 5 of the read request.

Table 5- 20 Structure of a read request via slave number 17, example

Value Byte Description


11 h 0 Slave address
03 h 1 Function code
00 h 2 Register start address "High" (register 40110)
6D h 3 Register start address "Low"
00 h 4 Number of registers "High" (2 registers: 40110; 40111)
02 h 5 number of registers "Low"
xx h 6 CRC "Low"
xx h 7 CRC "High"

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 145
Communication via RS485
5.4 Communication using Modbus RTU

The response returns the corresponding data set:

Table 5- 21 Slave response to the read request, example

Value Byte Description


11 h 0 Slave address
03 h 1 Function code
04 h 2 Number of bytes (4 bytes are returned)
11 h 3 Data first register "High"
22 h 4 Data first register "Low"
33 h 5 Data second register "High"
44 h 6 Data second register "Low"
xx h 7 CRC "Low"
xx h 8 CRC "High"

Table 5- 22 Invalid read request

Read request Converter response


Invalid register address Exception code 02 (invalid data address)
Read a write-only register Telegram in which all values are set to 0.
Read a reserved register
Controller addresses more than 125 registers Exception code 03 (invalid data value)
The start address and the number of registers of an Exception code 02 (invalid data address)
address are located outside of a defined register block

Fieldbuses
146 Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG
Communication via RS485
5.4 Communication using Modbus RTU

Structure of a write request via Modbus function code 06 (FC 06)


Start address is the holding register address.
Via FC 06, with one request, only precisely one register can be addressed. The value, which is
written to the addressed register, is contained in bytes 4 and 5 of the write request.

Table 5- 23 Structure of a write request for slave number 17, example

Value Byte Description


11 h 0 Slave address
06 h 1 Function code
00 h 2 Register start address "High" (write register 40100)
63 h 3 Register start address "Low"
55 h 4 Register data "High"
66 h 5 Register data "Low"
xx h 6 CRC "Low"
xx h 7 CRC "High"

The response returns register address (bytes 2 and 3) and the value (bytes 4 and 5), which
the higher-level control had written to the register.

Table 5- 24 Slave response to the write request

Value Byte Description


11 h 0 Slave address
06 h 1 Function code
00 h 2 Register start address "High"
63 h 3 Register start address "Low"
55 h 4 Register data "High"
66 h 5 Register data "Low"
xx h 6 CRC "Low"
xx h 7 CRC "High"

Table 5- 25 Invalid write request

Write request Converter response


Incorrect address (a holding register address does not exist) Exception Code 02 - invalid data
address
Write to a "read-only" register Exception Code 04 - device failure
Write to a reserved register

For Exception Code 4, via the holding register 40499, you can read out the internal drive
error code, which has occurred for the last parameter access via the holding register.

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 147
Communication via RS485
5.4 Communication using Modbus RTU

5.4.7 Acyclically read and write parameter via FC 16


Via FC 16, with one request, up to 122 registers can be written to directly one after the other,
while for Write Single Register (FC 06) you must individually write the header data for each
register.

Header
In addition to the slave address, enter the transfer type, the start address and the number of
the following registers in the header.

User data
You control the access in the user data via register 40601.
In register 40602, you define the acyclic access as well as the length of the request data.
Register 40603 contains the request reference - it is defined by the user - and the access type
-reading or writing.
Register 40604 contains the number of the drive object (always 1) and the number of
parameters that are read or written.
Register 40605 contains the attribute that you use to control whether you read out the
parameter value or the parameter attribute. In the number of elements you specify how
many indices are read.

See also
PROFIDRIVE profile - Acyclic communication (Page 49)

5.4.7.1 Read parameter

Example: r0002 read acyclically

Table 5- 26 Write parameter request: Reading the parameter value of r0002 from slave number 17

Value Byte Description


11 h 0 Slave address
10 h 1 Function code (write multiple)
0258 h 2,3 Register start address
0007 h 4,5 Number of registers to be read (40601 … 40607)
0E h 6 Number of data bytes (7 registers, each 2 bytes = 14 bytes)
0001 h 7,8 40601: DS47 Control = 1 (activate request)
2F0A h 9,10 40602: Function 2F h (47), request length 10 bytes (0A h)
8001 h 11,12 40603: Request reference = 80 h, request identifier = 1 h
0101 h 13,14 40604: DO-Id = 1, number of parameters = 1
1001 h 15,16 40605: Attribute, number of elements = 1
0002 h 17,18 40606: Parameter number = 2
0000 h 19,20 40607: Subindex = 0
xx h 21 CRC "Low"
xx h 22 CRC "High"

Fieldbuses
148 Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG
Communication via RS485
5.4 Communication using Modbus RTU

Table 5- 27 Start parameter request: Reading the parameter value of r0002 from slave number 17

Value Byte Description


11 h 0 Slave address
03 h 1 Function code (read)
0258 h 2,3 Register start address
0007 h 4,5 Number of registers to be read (40601 … 40607)
0010 h 6,7 Number of registers
xx h 8 CRC "Low"
xx h 9 CRC "High"

Table 5- 28 Response for successful read operation

Value Byte Description


11 h 0 Slave address
03 h 1 Function code (read)
20 h 2 Number of following data bytes (20 h: 32 bytes corresponds to 16 regis-
0002 h 3,4 ters)
2F08 h 5,6 40601: DS47 Control = 2 (the request was executed)
8001 h 7,8 40602: Function code 2F h (47), response lengths 8 bytes
40603: Request reference mirrored = 80 h,
0101 h 9,10 response identifier = 1 (request parameter)
0301 h 11,12 40604: DO-ID = 1, number of parameters = 1
001F h 13,14 40605: Format, number of elements = 1
40606: Parameter value = 1F h (31)
xx h 15 CRC "Low"
xx h 16 CRC "High"

Table 5- 29 Response for unsuccessful read operation - read request still not completed

Value Byte Description


11 h 0 Slave address
03 h 1 Function code (read)
20 h 2 Number of following data bytes (20 h: 32 bytes corresponds to 16 regis-
0001 h 3,4 ters)
2F00 h 5,6 40601: Check value 1 = request is processed
0004 h 7,8 40602: Function 2F h(47), response length 0 (fault)
40603: Error code: 0004 Response Not Ready (response has still not been
issued)
xx h 9 CRC "Low"
xx h 10 CRC "High"

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 149
Communication via RS485
5.4 Communication using Modbus RTU

5.4.7.2 Write parameter

Example: Set p1121 = 12.15

Table 5- 30 Write parameter request: Writing the parameter value of p1121 from slave number 17

Value Byte Description


11 h 0 Slave address
10 h 1 Function code (write multiple)
0258 h 2,3 Register start address
000A h 4,5 Number of registers to be written to (40601 … 40610)
14 h 6 Number of data bytes (10 registers, each 2 bytes = 20 bytes)
0001 h 7,8 40601: C1 (activate request)
2F10 h 9,10 40602: Function 2F h (47), request length 16 bytes (10 h)
8002 h 11,12 40603: Request reference = 80 h, request identifier = 2 h (write)
0101 h 13,14 40604: DO-Id = 1, number of parameters = 1
1001 h 15,16 40605: Attribute, number of elements = 1
0461 h 17,18 40606: Parameter number = 1121
0000 h 19,20 40607: Subindex = 0
0801 h 21,22 40608: Format + number of values
4142 h 23,24 40609: Parameter value 12,15
6666 h 25,26 40610: Parameter value
xx h 27 CRC "Low"
xx h 28 CRC "High"

Table 5- 31 Start parameter request: Writing the parameter value of p1121 from slave number 17

Value Byte Description


11 h 0 Slave address
06 h 1 Function code (write)
0258 h 2,3 Register start address
0007 h 4,5 Number of registers to be written to (40601 … 40610)
0010 h 6,7 Number of registers
xx h 8 CRC "Low"
xx h 9 CRC "High"

Fieldbuses
150 Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG
Communication via RS485
5.4 Communication using Modbus RTU

Table 5- 32 Response for successful write operation

Value Byte Description


11 h 0 Slave address
06 h 1 Function code (write)
20 h 2 Number of following data bytes (20 h: 32 bytes corresponds to 16 regis-
0002 h 3,4 ters)
2F04 h 5,6 40601: DS47 Control = 2 (request was executed)
8002 h 7,8 40602: Function code 2F h (47), response length 4 bytes
40603: Request reference mirrored = 80 h,
0101 h 9,10 response identifier = 2 (change parameter)
40604: DO-ID = 1, number of parameters = 1
xx h 11 CRC "Low"
xx h 12 CRC "High"

Table 5- 33 Response for unsuccessful write operation - write request still not completed

Value Byte Description


11 h 0 Slave address
06 h 1 Function code (write)
20 h 2 Number of following data bytes (20 h: 32 bytes corresponds to 16 regis-
0001 h 3,4 ters)
2F00 h 5,6 40601: DS47 Control = 1 (request is processed)
0004 h 7,8 40602: Function 2F h(47), response length 0 (fault)
40603: Error code: 0004 Response Not Ready (response has still not been
issued)
xx h 9 CRC "Low"
xx h 10 CRC "High"

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 151
Communication via RS485
5.4 Communication using Modbus RTU

5.4.8 Communication procedure

Procedure for communication in a normal case


Normally, the master sends a telegram to a slave (address range 1 ... 247). The slave sends a
response telegram to the master. This response telegram mirrors the function code; the slave
enters its own address in the telegram and so the slave identifies itself with the master.
The slave only processes orders and telegrams which are directly addressed to it.

Communication error
If the slave detects a communication error on receipt (parity, CRC), it does not send a
response to the master, since this can lead to "setpoint timeout".

Logical error
If the slave detects a logical error within a request, it responds to the master with an
"exception response". In the response, the slave sets the highest bit in the function code to 1.
If the slave receives, for example, an unsupported function code from the master, the slave
responds with an "exception response" with code 01 (Illegal function code).

Table 5- 34 Overview of exception codes

Exception Modbus name Remark


code
01 Illegal function code An unknown (unsupported) function code was sent to the
slave.
02 Illegal Data Address An invalid address was requested.
03 Illegal data value An invalid data value was detected.
04 Server failure Slave has terminated during processing.

Maximum processing time, p2024[0]


The slave-response time is the time in which the Modbus master expects a response to a
request. Set the same slave-response time (p2024 [0] in the converter) in the master and
slave.

Process data monitoring time (setpoint timeout), p2040


"Setpoint timeout" (F1910) is issued by the Modbus if p2040 is set to a value > 0 ms and no
process data is requested within this time period.
The "Setpoint timeout" only applies for access to process data (40100, 40101, 40110,
40111). The "Setpoint timeout" is not generated for parameter data (40200 … 40522).

Note
Adjust the time (factory setting = 100 ms) depending on the number of slaves and the baud
rate set on the bus.

Fieldbuses
152 Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG
Communication via RS485
5.4 Communication using Modbus RTU

5.4.9 Application example


An application example for MODBUS RTU is provided on the Internet:
Communication via the MODBUS interface
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/35928944)

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 153
Communication via RS485
5.5 Communication via BACnet MS/TP - only CU230P-2 HVAC / BT

5.5 Communication via BACnet MS/TP - only CU230P-2 HVAC / BT

BACnet properties
In BACnet, components and systems are considered to be black boxes which contain a
number of objects. BACnet objects only stipulate the behavior outside the device, BACnet sets
no internal functions.
A range of object types and their instances represent one component.
Each BACnet device has precisely one BACnet device object. An NSAP (Network Service Access
Point - comprising network number and MAC address; MAC: Medium Access Control)
uniquely identifies a BACnet device. This address is BACnet-specific and must not be confused
with the Ethernet MAC address.

Data exchange with the client


The converter receives control commands and setpoints via service instructions from the
control and transmits its status back to the control. The converter can also autonomously
send telegrams or execute services, e.g. COV_Notification.

Communication settings
• The Control Unit supports BACnet via RS485 (BACnet MS/TP),
• Communication supports Unicode, coded with the character set UTF-8
• The maximum cable length is 1200 m (3281 ft).

Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement


The Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement (PICS) is available on the Internet:
PICS (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/109760469)

Note
It is not permitted to change over the units
The "Unit switchover" function – for details see the operating instructions of the Control Unit
– is not permissible with this bus system!

Fieldbuses
154 Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG
Communication via RS485
5.5 Communication via BACnet MS/TP - only CU230P-2 HVAC / BT

5.5.1 Basic settings for communication

Setting communication via BACnet

Procedure
1. Select the default setting 110
– With Startdrive during commissioning step "Default setting of setpoint/command
sources":
110 "BT Mac 10: BACnet MS/TP fieldbus"
– With the BOP-2 during the basic commissioning under step "MAc PAr P15":
P_F bAc
– Via parameter number:
p0015 = 110
2. Set the converter address.
3. Make additional changes based on the parameters listed in the following sections.
4. If you are working with Startdrive, back up the settings so they are not lost if the power fails.
You have now made the settings for communication via BACnet.

Settings by "BT Mac 10: BACnet MS/TP fieldbus"

Fieldbus protocol selection p2030 = 5

Baud rate p2020 = 8, 38400 bit/s


Setting range: 9600 bit/s … 76800 bit/s

Fieldbus monitoring time p2040 = 1000 ms


Setting range: 0 ms … 1999999 ms
The more slaves that are connected in the network, the longer the fieldbus monitoring time
must be.
If process data is not transferred within one cycle of the fieldbus monitoring time, then the
converter shuts down with fault F01910.
p2040 = 0 ⇒ bus monitoring deactivated.

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 155
Communication via RS485
5.5 Communication via BACnet MS/TP - only CU230P-2 HVAC / BT

5.5.1.1 Setting the address

Valid address area: 0 ... 127


With address 0, the converter responds to a broadcast.
You have the following options for setting the BACnet address:
• Using the address switch on the Control Unit:

Figure 5-13 Address switch with example for bus address 10

The address switch has priority over the other settings.


• Using Startdrive or an operator panel via parameter p2021 (default setting: p2021 = 0).
it is only possible to change p2021 if the address switch is set to 0.
If you are working with Startdrive, back up the settings so they are not lost if the power
fails.
You can find the position of the address switch in the operating instructions for the
converter.
Manuals and technical support (Page 244)

Activating the changed bus address

Procedure
1. Set the address as described above.
2. Switch off the converter power supply.
3. Wait until all LEDs on the converter are dark.
4. Switch on the converter power supply again.
Your settings become effective after switching on.
You have now set the bus address.

Fieldbuses
156 Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG
Communication via RS485
5.5 Communication via BACnet MS/TP - only CU230P-2 HVAC / BT

5.5.1.2 Parameters for setting communication via BACnet

General settings

Processing times p2024[0 … 2]


p2024[0]: 0 ms … 10000 ms, maximum processing time (APDU timeout), factory setting =
6000 ms,
p2024 [1 … 2]: Irrelevant

BACnet communication parameter p2025[0 … 3]


• p2025 [0]: 0 … 4194303: Device object instance number,
Factory setting = 1
• p2025 [1]: 1 … 10: Maximum Info Frames, factory setting = 5
• p2025 [2]: 0 … 39: Number of APDU Retries (repeated attempts after fault telegrams),
factory setting = 3
• p2025 [3]: 1 … 127: maximum master address, factory setting = 32

Setting COV_Increment p2026[0 … 75]


(COV = change of values) 0 … 4194303.000, factory setting = 1. A maximum of 32 COVs are
permissible.
COV_Increment: Changes the value of the "present value" of an object instance for which the
server transfers an UnConfirmedCOV_Notification or ConfirmedCOV_Notification.
You can use these parameters to set the converter value changes for which an
UnConfirmedCOV_Notification or ConfirmedCOV_Notification result is sent.
The factory setting 1 means that the converter sends an UnConfirmedCOV_Notification or
ConfirmedCOV_Notification if the considered value, e.g. for a range of 0 … 10 V, changes by
an absolute value ≥ 1.
This requires an active SubscribeCOV_Service to send the relevant object instance.
You can also set the COV_Increment via the object property "COV_Increment" of the relevant
analog input, analog output or analog value.

BACnet language selection p2027


German/English - only becomes effective after power off/on

Fieldbus error statistics r2029


Displaying receive errors at the fieldbus interface

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 157
Communication via RS485
5.5 Communication via BACnet MS/TP - only CU230P-2 HVAC / BT

Device name - default setting, change, restore factory setting


The converter has a device name in BACnet that uniquely identifies the converter.
The device name is preset at initial power up. It has the following structure:

p7610[0…79] contains the device names in ASCII format.

Changing device names - procedure


1. Change the device name either in the converter or via the controller:
– Converter: Change p7610
– Controller: Change the "object-name" property via the Write Property Service
2. Switch off the converter power supply to activate the name.
3. Wait until all LEDs on the converter are dark.
4. Switch on the converter power supply again.
Your settings become active after switching on.
The device name is now changed.

Restoring factory settings


The device name is retained when the factory settings are restored.
If you wish to reset the name to the factory setting, original value, set p7610[0] = NULL
(ASCII-0) and proceed as described above.

Interconnecting analog outputs, restoring factory settings


If you set communication via BACnet, the converter switches its analog outputs with the
fieldbus.
The control then specifies the values which the converter outputs via its analog outputs.
To display a converter-specific value, you must change the interconnection of the analog
output.
Examples:
• AO 0 should display the value which the control specifies in the ANALOG OUTPUT 0 object.
In this particular case, no other settings are required in the converter.
• AO 1 should display the smoothed current actual value of the converter (r0027 smoothed
current actual value).
Interconnect p0771[1] with r0027: p0771[1] = 27
In this case, write access via the object ANALOG OUTPUT 1 results in an error message in
the control.

Reset to the factory setting for BACnet


When restoring the factory setting, the converter again uses the fieldbus to switch its analog
outputs.

Fieldbuses
158 Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG
Communication via RS485
5.5 Communication via BACnet MS/TP - only CU230P-2 HVAC / BT

5.5.2 Supported services and objects

BIBBs used by the converter


The BIBBs (BIBB: BACnet Interoperability Building Block) are a collection of one or several
BACnet services. BACnet services are subdivided into A and B devices. An A device operates as
client and a B device as server.
The converter is a server and therefore operates as B device, as "BACnet Application Specific
Controller" (B-ASC).
It uses the following executed BIBBs.

Overview of the BIBB used and the associated services

Short designation BIBB Service


DS-RP-B Data Sharing-ReadProperty-B ReadProperty
DS-RPM-B Data Sharing-ReadMultipleProperty-B ReadPropertyMultiple
DS-WP-B Data Sharing-WriteProperty-B WriteProperty
DM-DDB-B Device Management-Dynamic Device • Who-Is
Binding-B
• I-Am
DM-DOB-B Device Management-Dynamic Object • Who-Has
Binding-B
• I-Have
DM-DCC-B Device Management- DeviceCommunicationControl
DeviceCommunicationControl-B
DS-COV-B Data Sharing-COV-B • SubscribeCOV,
• ConfirmedCOVNotification,
• UnConfirmedCOVNotification

The converter can simultaneously process up to 32 SubscribeCOV services. These can all refer
to the same object instances - or different object instances.
SubscribeCOV monitors the property changes of the following objects:
• Analog Input AI…
• Analog Output AO…
• Analog Value AV…
• Binary Value BV…
• Multi-State Input MSI…

Note
SubscribeCOV services are not retentive; i.e. the master must re-initiate the SubscribeCOV
services when restarting the converter.

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 159
Communication via RS485
5.5 Communication via BACnet MS/TP - only CU230P-2 HVAC / BT

Object types in BACnet

Object type Code digit Object type Code digit


Device Object 8 Analog Output AO… 1
Binary Input BI… 3 Analog Value AV… 2
Binary Output BO… 4 Multi-State Input MSI… 13
Binary Value BV… 5 Octet String Values 47
Analog Input AI… 0

Object properties of the "Device" object type

• Object_Identifier • Application_Software_Version • APDU_Timeout

• Object_Name • Protocol_Version • Number_Of_APDU_Retries

• Object_Type • Protocol_Revision • Max Master

• System_Status • Protocol_Services_Supported • Max Info Frames

• Vendor_Name • Protocol_Object_Types_Supported • Device Address Binding

• Vendor_Identifier • Object_List • Database Revision

• Model_Name • Max_APDU_Length_Accepted 1)

• Firmware_Revision • Segmentation_Supported 2)

1) Length = 480, 2) not supported

Properties of the other object types

Property Object type


Binary Binary Binary Analog Analog Analog Multi- Octet
Input BI… Output Value BV… Input AI… Output Value AV… State In- String
BO… AO… put MSI… values
Object_Identifier X X X X X X X X
Object_Name X X X X X X X X
Object_Type X X X X X X X X
Present_Value X X X X X X X X
Description X X X X X X X
Status_Flags X X X X X X X X
Event_State X X X X X X X
Out_Of_Service X X X X X X X
Units X X X
Priority_Array X X 1) X X 1)
Relin- X X 1) X X 1)
quish_Default
Polarity X X
Active_Text X X X
Inactive_Text X X X

Fieldbuses
160 Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG
Communication via RS485
5.5 Communication via BACnet MS/TP - only CU230P-2 HVAC / BT

Property Object type


Binary Binary Binary Analog Analog Analog Multi- Octet
Input BI… Output Value BV… Input AI… Output Value AV… State In- String
BO… AO… put MSI… values
COV_Increment X X X
State_Text X
Num- X
ber_of_States
1) Only for access type C: Commandable

Note
Language switching
Using parameter p2027, you can switch the language of the BACnet object properties
(German, English). Only the English identifiers (e.g. "Object name") are specified in the
following tables.

Binary Input Objects

Instance Object name Description Possible Text active / Access Parameter


ID values text inactive type
BI0 DI0 ACT State of DI 0 ON/OFF ON/OFF R r0722.0
BI1 DI1 ACT State of DI 1 ON/OFF ON/OFF R r0722.1
BI2 DI2 ACT State of DI 2 ON/OFF ON/OFF R r0722.2
BI3 DI3 ACT State of DI 3 ON/OFF ON/OFF R r0722.3
BI4 DI4 ACT State of DI 4 ON/OFF ON/OFF R r0722.4
BI5 DI5 ACT State of DI 5 ON/OFF ON/OFF R r0722.5
BI7 DI7 ACT State of AI 0 - used as DI 11 ON/OFF ON/OFF R r0722.11
BI8 DI8 ACT State of AI 1 - used as DI 12 ON/OFF ON/OFF R r0722.12
BI10 DO0 ACT State of DO 0 (relay 1) ON/OFF ON/OFF R read r0747.0
BI11 DO1 ACT State of DO 1 (relay 2) ON/OFF ON/OFF R read r0747.1
BI12 DO2 ACT State of DO2 (relay 3) ON/OFF ON/OFF R read r0747.2

Binary Output Objects

Instance Object name Description Possible Text active / Access Parameter


ID values text inactive type
BO0 DO0 CMD Controls DO 0 (relay 1) ON/OFF ON/OFF C p0730
BO1 DO1 CMD Controls DO 1 (relay 2) ON/OFF ON/OFF C p0731
BO2 DO2 CMD Controls DO 2 (relay 3) ON/OFF ON/OFF C p0732

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 161
Communication via RS485
5.5 Communication via BACnet MS/TP - only CU230P-2 HVAC / BT

Analog Input Objects

Instance Object name Description Unit Range Access Parameter


ID type
AI0 ANALOG IN 0 AI0 input signal V/mA Converter- R r0752[0]
dependent
AI1 ANALOG IN 1 AI1 input signal V/mA Converter- R r0752[1]
dependent
AI10 AIN 0 SCALED Scaled AI 0 input signal % Converter- R r0755[0]
dependent
AI11 AIN 1 SCALED Scaled AI 1 input signal % Converter- R r0755[1]
dependent

Analog Output Objects

Instance Object name Description Unit Range Access Parameter


ID type
AO0 ANALOG OUT 0 Value of AO0 % Converter- C p0791.0
dependent
AO1 ANALOG OUT 1 Value of AO1 % Converter- C p0791.1
dependent

Binary Value BV…

Instance Object Description Possible values Text Text Ac- Parameter


ID name active inactive cess
type1)
BV0 RUN Converter status regardless of RUN / STOP STOP RUN R r0052.2
STOPPED command source
BV1 FWD REV Direction of rotation regardless of REV / FWD FWD REV R r0052.14
command source
BV2 FAULT Converter fault FAULT / OK FAULT OK R r0052.3
BV3 WARN Converter warning WARN / OK WARN OK R r0052.7
BV4 MANUAL Source of Manual/Auto converter AUTO / MANUAL AUTO LOCAL R r0052.9
AUTO control
BV61) MAINT REQ Maintenance required MAINT/OK MAINT OK R reserved
BV7 HAND Control of the converter from the ON/OFF 0 1 R r2032[10]
CONTROL BACnet override control via BV93
The "Manual" mode of the operator
panel has a higher priority than the
BACnet override control.
BV8 AT SET- Setpoint reached YES / NO YES NO R r0052.8
POINT
BV9 AT MAX Maximum speed reached YES / NO YES NO R r0052.10
FREQ
BV10 DRIVE Converter ready YES / NO YES NO R r0052.1
READY
BV15 HAND Status of the ON command, regard- YES / NO 0 1 R r2032[0]
RUNNING less of the source

Fieldbuses
162 Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG
Communication via RS485
5.5 Communication via BACnet MS/TP - only CU230P-2 HVAC / BT

Instance Object Description Possible values Text Text Ac- Parameter


ID name active inactive cess
type1)
BV16 HIB MOD Energy saving mode is active ON/OFF 0 1 R r2399[1]
ACT
BV17 ESM MOD Essential service mode is active ON/OFF 0 1 R r3889[0]
BV20 RUN STOP ON command for the converter RUN / STOP 0 1 C r0054.0
CMD (when controlling via BACnet)
BV21 FWD REV Reverse direction of rotation (when REV / FWD 0 1 C r0054.11
CMD controlling via BACnet)
BV22 FAULT Acknowledge fault (when control- RESET / NO 0 1 C r0054.7
RESET ling via BACnet)
BV24 CDS Changeover drive control Local / Remote YES NO C r0054.15
BV26 RUN ENA Enable converter operation ENABLE DISABLE C r0054.3
CMD D D
BV27 OFF2 Status OFF2 RUN / STOP 0 1 C r0054.1
BV28 OFF3 Status OFF3 RUN / STOP 0 1 C r0054.2
BV28 sets the r0054.4, r0054.5, and
r0054.6 bits
BV50 ENABLE PID Enable technology controller ENABLED / ENABLE DISABLE C p2200
DISABLED D D
BV51 ENABLE PID Enable technology controller 0 ENABLED / ENABLE DISABLE C p11000
0 DISABLED D D
BV52 ENABLE PID Enable technology controller 1 ENABLED / ENABLE DISABLE C p11100
1 DISABLED D D
BV53 ENABLE PID Enable technology controller 2 ENABLED / ENABLE DISABLE C p11200
2 DISABLED D D
BV90 LOCAL Use MANUAL (operator panel) to LOCK UNLOC C p0806
LOCK lock converter control K
BV912) LOCK Interlocking for operator panel and LOCK/UNLO 0 1 W reserved
PANEL parameter changes
BV93 CTL Converter control using BACnet ON/OFF 0 1 C r0054.10
OVERRIDE override control
1) C: Commandable, R: Readable, W: Writable
2) reserved for future functional expansions

Analog Value AV…

In- Object name Description Unit Range Access Parameter


stance type1)
ID
AV0 OUT FREQ HZ Output frequency (Hz) Hz converter- R r0024
dependent
AV1 OUT FREQ PCT Output frequency (%) % converter- R HIW
dependent
AV2 OUTPUT SPEED Motor speed RPM converter- R r0022
dependent
AV3 DC BUS VOLT DC-link voltage. V converter- R r0026
dependent

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 163
Communication via RS485
5.5 Communication via BACnet MS/TP - only CU230P-2 HVAC / BT

In- Object name Description Unit Range Access Parameter


stance type1)
ID
AV4 OUTPUT VOLT Output voltage V converter- R r0025
dependent
AV5 CURRENT Motor current A converter- R r0027
dependent
AV6 TORQUE Motor torque Nm converter- R r0031
dependent
AV7 POWER Motor power kW converter- R r0032
dependent
AV8 DRIVE TEMP Heat sink temperature °C converter- R r0037
dependent
AV9 MOTOR TEMP Measured or calculated motor °C converter- R r0035
temperature dependent
AV10 KWH NR Cumulative converter energy kWh converter- R r0039
consumption (cannot be reset!) dependent
AV12 INV RUN TIME Motor's operating hours (is reset h 0 … 4294967295 W p0650
by entering "0")
AV13 INV MODEL Code number of Power Module --- converter- R r0200
dependent
AV14 INV FW VER Firmware version --- converter- R r0018
dependent
AV15 INV POWER Rated power of the converter kW converter- R r0206
dependent
AV16 RPM STPT 1 Reference speed of the convert- RPM 6.0 … 210000 W p2000
er
AV17 FREQ SP PCT Setpoint 1 (when controlling via % -199.99 … 199.99 C HSW
BACnet)
AV18 ACT FAULT Number of the fault due to be --- converter- R r0947[0]
dealt with dependent
AV19 PREV FAULT 1 Number of the last fault --- converter- R r0947[1]
dependent
AV20 PREV FAULT 2 Number of the fault before last --- converter- R r0947[2]
dependent
AV21 PREV FAULT 3 Number of the fault third from --- converter- R r0947[3]
last dependent
AV22 PREV FAULT 4 Number of the fault fourth from --- converter- R r0947[4]
last dependent
AV25 SEL STPT Command to select the setpoint --- 0 … 32767 W p1000
source
AV28 AO1 ACT Signal from AO 1 mA converter- R r0774.0
dependent
AV29 AO2 ACT Signal from AO 1 mA converter- R r0774.1
dependent
AV30 MIN Speed Minimum speed RPM 0.000 – 19500.000 W p1080
AV31 MAX Speed Maximum speed RPM 0.000 … 210000.0 W p1082
00
AV32 ACCEL TIME Ramp-up time s 0.00 … 999999.0 W p1120
AV33 DECEL TIME Ramp-down time s 0.00 … 999999.0 W p1121
AV34 CUR LIM Current limit A converter- R p0640
dependent

Fieldbuses
164 Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG
Communication via RS485
5.5 Communication via BACnet MS/TP - only CU230P-2 HVAC / BT

In- Object name Description Unit Range Access Parameter


stance type1)
ID
AV39 ACT WARN Indication of a pending alarm --- converter- R r2110[0]
dependent
AV40 PREV WARN 1 Indication of the last alarm --- converter- R r2110[1]
dependent
AV41 PREV WARN 2 Indication of the last but one --- converter- R r2110[2]
alarm dependent
AV5000 RAMP UP TIME Technology controller ramp-up s 0 … 650 W p2257
time
AV5001 RAMP DOWN TIME Technology controller ramp- s 0 … 650 W p2258
down time
AV5002 FILTER TIME Technology controller actual s 0 … 60 W p2265
value filter time constant
AV5003 DIFF TIME Technology controller differenti- s 0 … 60 W p2274
ation time constant
AV5004 PROP GAIN Technology controller propor- s 0 … 1000 W p2280
tional gain
AV5005 INTEG TIME Technology controller integral s 0 … 1000 W p2285
time
AV5006 OUTPUT MAX Technology controller maximum % - 200 … 200 W p2291
limiting
AV5007 OUTPUT MIN Technology controller minimum % - 200 … 200 W p2292
limiting
AV5100 RAMP UP TIME 0 Technology controller 0 ramp-up s 0 … 650 W p11057
time
AV5101 RAMP DOWN TIME 0 Technology controller 0 ramp- s 0 … 650 W p11058
down time
AV5102 FILTER TIME 0 Technology controller 0 actual s 0 … 60 W p11065
value filter time constant
AV5103 DIFF TIME 0 Technology controller 0 differen- s 0 … 60 W p11074
tiation time constant
AV5104 PROP GAIN 0 Technology controller 0 propor- s 0 … 1000 W p11080
tional gain
AV5105 INTEG TIME 0 Technology controller 0 integral s 0 … 1000 W p11085
time
AV5106 OUTPUT MAX 0 Technology controller 0 maxi- % - 200 … 200 W p11091
mum limiting
AV5107 OUTPUT MIN 0 Technology controller 0 mini- % - 200 … 200 W p11092
mum limiting
AV5200 RAMP UP TIME 1 Technology controller 1 ramp-up s 0 … 650 W p11157
time
AV5201 RAMP DOWN TIME 1 Technology controller 1 ramp- s 0 … 650 W p11158
down time
AV5202 FILTER TIME 1 Technology controller 1 actual s 0 … 60 W p11165
value filter time constant
AV5203 DIFF TIME 1 Technology controller 1 differen- s 0 … 60 W p11174
tiation time constant
AV5204 PROP GAIN 1 Technology controller 1 propor- s 0 … 1000 W p11180
tional gain
AV5205 INTEG TIME 1 Technology controller integral s 0 … 1000 W p11185
time

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 165
Communication via RS485
5.5 Communication via BACnet MS/TP - only CU230P-2 HVAC / BT

In- Object name Description Unit Range Access Parameter


stance type1)
ID
AV5206 OUTPUT MAX 1 Technology controller 1 maxi- % - 200 … 200 W p11191
mum limiting
AV5207 OUTPUT MIN 1 Technology controller 1 mini- % - 200 … 200 W p11192
mum limiting
AV5300 RAMP UP TIME 2 Technology controller 2 ramp-up s 0 … 650 W p11257
time
AV5301 RAMP DOWN TIME 2 Technology controller 2 ramp- s 0 … 650 W p11258
down time
AV5302 FILTER TIME 2 Technology controller 2 actual s 0 … 60 W p11265
value filter time constant
AV5303 DIFF TIME 2 Technology controller 2 differen- s 0 … 60 W p11274
tiation time constants
AV5304 PROP GAIN 2 Technology controller 2 propor- s 0 … 1000 W p11280
tional gain
AV5305 INTEG TIME 2 Technology controller 2 integral s 0 … 1000 W p11285
time
AV5306 OUTPUT MAX 2 Technology controller 2 maxi- % - 200 … 200 W p11291
mum limiting
AV5307 OUTPUT MIN 2 Technology controller 2 mini- % - 200 … 200 W p11292
mum limiting
1) C: Commandable, R: Readable, W: Writable

Multi-State Input MSI…

Instance Object name Description Possible values Access type Parameter


ID
MSI0 FAULT 1 Fault number 1 See "List of fault codes R r0947[0]
MSI1 FAULT 2 Fault number 2 and alarm codes" R r0947[1]
MSI2 FAULT 3 Fault number 3 R r0947[2]
MSI3 FAULT 4 Fault number 4 R r0947[3]
MSI4 FAULT 5 Fault number 5 R r0947[4]
MSI5 FAULT 6 Fault number 6 R r0947[5]
MSI6 FAULT 7 Fault number 7 R r0947[6]
MSI7 FAULT 8 Fault number 8 R r0947[7]
MSI8 WARNING 1 Warning number 1 R r2110[0]
MS9 WARNING 2 Warning number 2 R r2110[1]
MSI10 WARNING 3 Warning number 3 R r2110[2]
MSI11 WARNING 4 Warning number 4 R r2110[3]
MSI12 WARNING 5 Warning number 5 R r2110[4]
MSI13 WARNING 6 Warning number 6 R r2110[5]
MSI14 WARNING 7 Warning number 7 R r2110[6]
MSI15 WARNING 8 Warning number 8 R r2110[7]
1) R: Readable

Fieldbuses
166 Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG
Communication via RS485
5.5 Communication via BACnet MS/TP - only CU230P-2 HVAC / BT

5.5.3 Acyclic communication (general parameter access) via BACnet


Acyclic communication or general parameter access is realized via BACnet objects DS47IN and
DS47OUT.
Acyclic communication uses the octet string value objects OSV0 and OSV1.

Instance Object name Description Access


ID type
OSV0 DS47IN Maximum length 242, of which two bytes header, 240 W
OSV1 DS47OUT bytes user data R

The OSV are structured as follows:

Function Request length User data


Code
2F (1 Byte) (1 byte) Maximum 240 bytes

Write parameter request with OSV0 and read with OSV1


To read parameter r0002 write the following values into the present value window of OSV0

Table 5- 35 Write parameter request via OSV0

Byte Description
2F h 1 Function code 2F h (47),
0A h 2 Request length 10 bytes (0A h)
80 h 3 Request reference = 80 h
01 h 4 Request identifier = 1 h
01 h 5 DO-Id = 1
01 h 6 Number of parameters = 1
10 h 7 Attribute
01 h 8 Number of elements = 1
0002 h 9,10 Parameter number = 2
0000 h 11,12 Subindex = 0

If the request was successfully processed, then you can read out the response precisely once
from the present value window of the OSV1:

Table 5- 36 Read parameter content via OSV1

Byte Description
2F h 1 Function code 2F h (47)
08 h 2 Response length 8 bytes
80 h 3 Request reference = 80 h
01 h 4 Request identifier = 1 h
01 h 5 DO-Id = 1
01 h 6 Number of parameters = 1
10 h 7 Format
01 h 8 Number of elements = 1
001F h 9,10 Parameter value 1F h = 31

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 167
Communication via RS485
5.5 Communication via BACnet MS/TP - only CU230P-2 HVAC / BT

If the response is still not available, then you receive the following message via the present
value window of the OSV1:

Table 5- 37 Read parameter content via OSV1

Byte Description
2F h 1 Function code 2F h (47)
00 h 2 Response length 0 (error)
0004 h 3,4 Error code 4 h (response still not available)

If you wish to read the response once more, then you obtain the following message via the
present value window of the OSV1:

Table 5- 38 Read parameter content again via OSV1

Byte Description
2F h 1 Function code 2F h (47)
00 h 2 response length 0 (error)
0002 h 3,4 Error code 2 h (Invalid State)

Overview of the error codes


1 h: Invalid Length (invalid length)
2 h: Invalid State (action is not permitted in the actual converter state)
3 h: Invalid function Code (FC = 2 hex)
4 h: Response not ready (the response has still not been issued)
5 h: Internal Error (general system error)
Incorrect access operations to parameters via data set 47 are logged in objects OSV0 and
OSV1.

Fieldbuses
168 Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG
Communication via RS485
5.6 Communication via P1 - only CU230P-2 HVAC, CU230P-2 BT

5.6 Communication via P1 - only CU230P-2 HVAC, CU230P-2 BT


P1 is an asynchronous master-slave communication between what is known as a Field
Cabinet (master) and the FLN devices (slaves). FLN stands for "Floor level network".
The master individually addresses the various slaves. A slave responds only if the master
addresses it. Communication between the slaves is not possible.
A Field Cabinet can have several FLN ports. You can connect up to 32 FLN devices to each FLN
port (slaves).

Settings in the controller


In the Field Cabinet, for each slave you must install what is known as a "Logical controller
(LCTR) point". In addition, in the Field Cabinet you must define the "Point numbers" for
communication.
An overview of the "Point Numbers" is provided on the following pages.

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 169
Communication via RS485
5.6 Communication via P1 - only CU230P-2 HVAC, CU230P-2 BT

5.6.1 Basic settings for communication via P1

Overview

Procedure
Proceed as follows to set communication via P1:
1. Select the default setting 114
– With Startdrive during commissioning step "Default setting of setpoint/command
sources":
114 "BT Mac 14: Communication P1"
– With the BOP-2 during basic commissioning under step "MAc PAr P15":
P_F _P1
– Via parameter number:
p0015 = 114
After selecting default setting 114, the converter automatically sets the following
parameters:
– p2030 = 8: Fieldbus protocol P1
– p2020 = 5: Baud rate 4800 bit/s
– p0840 = 2090.0 The ON/OFF1 command is interconnected with control word 1, bit 0
– p0852 = 2090.3: The signal for "Enable operation" is interconnected with control
word 1, bit 3
– p2103[0] = 2090.7: The signal for "Acknowledge fault" is interconnected with control
word 1, bit 7
2. Set the address.
Irrespective of the address that has been set, every FLN device responds to telegrams with
address 99.
3. Make additional changes based on the parameters listed in the following sections.
4. If you are working with Startdrive, back up the settings so they are not lost if the power fails.
You have now set the communication via P1.

Additional parameters for adapting communication via P1


p2020 = 7: Baud rate 19200 bit/s
p1070 = 2050[1]: Receive main setpoint via fieldbus
p2051[0] = 52: Send status word via fieldbus
p2051[1] = 63: Send speed actual value via fieldbus

Fieldbuses
170 Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG
Communication via RS485
5.6 Communication via P1 - only CU230P-2 HVAC, CU230P-2 BT

5.6.2 Setting the address

Valid address area: 1 … 99


You have the following options for setting the address:
• Using the address switch on the Control Unit:

Figure 5-14 Address switch with example for bus address 10

The address switch has priority over the other settings.


• Using Startdrive or an operator panel via parameter p2021 (default setting: p2021 = 99).
It is only possible to change p2021 if an invalid address is set in the address switch.
If you are working with Startdrive, back up the settings so they are not lost if the power
fails.
You can find the position of the address switch in the operating instructions for the
converter.
Manuals and technical support (Page 244)

Activating the changed bus address

Procedure
1. Set the address as described above.
2. Switch off the converter power supply.
3. Wait until all LEDs on the converter are dark.
4. Switch on the converter power supply again.
Your settings become effective after switching on.
You have now set the bus address.

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 171
Communication via RS485
5.6 Communication via P1 - only CU230P-2 HVAC, CU230P-2 BT

5.6.3 Point numbers


The subsequently listed "Point Numbers" for communication are defined using P1 in the
converter. The values listed in the tables refer to SI units.

Fieldbuses
172 Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG
Communication via RS485
5.6 Communication via P1 - only CU230P-2 HVAC, CU230P-2 BT

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 173
Communication via RS485
5.6 Communication via P1 - only CU230P-2 HVAC, CU230P-2 BT

1*): For reasons of compatibility, these type 1 subpoints can save COV area information.
Point Number 98 RAM TO ROM was implemented in order to be able to save these in a non-
volatile fashion.

Fieldbuses
174 Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG
Communication via RS485
5.6 Communication via P1 - only CU230P-2 HVAC, CU230P-2 BT

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 175
Communication over CANopen 6
General information on CAN
You can find general information about CAN on the Internet:
CAN Internet pages (http://www.can-cia.org)
You can find the CANdictionary with explanations of CAN terminology on the Internet:
CAN downloads (http://www.can-cia.org/index.php?id=6).

Integrating a converter in a CANopen network


You can find the EDS file for integrating the converter in a CANopen network on the Internet:
EDS (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/48351511)
The EDS file is the description file of the SINAMICS G120 converter for CANopen networks. In
this way, you can use the objects of the DSP 402 device profile.
The following Control Units and converters have an CANopen interface

G120 CU230P-2 CAN G120C CAN


G120 CU250S-2 CAN

Table 6- 1 Pin assignment of the connector

Signal D sub connector

--- 1
CAN_L, CAN signal (dominant low) 2
CAN_GND, CAN ground 3
--- 4
(CAN _SHLD), optional shield 5
(CAN_GND), optional ground 6
CAN_H, CAN signal (dominant high) 7
--- 8
--- 9

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 177
Communication over CANopen

Grounding the CANopen Control Unit


The CAN ground (pin 3) and the optional ground are electrically isolated from the ground
potential of the system.
The optional shield (pin 5) and the connector housing are connected with the ground
potential of the system.

CANopen functions of the converter


CANopen is a communication protocol with line-type topology that operates on the basis of
communication objects (COB).
SINAMICS G120 converters with CANopen interface comply with the following standards:
• CiA 301 (Application Layer and Communication Profile)
• CiA 303-3 (Indicator Specification)
• CiA 306 (Electronic Data Sheet Specification for CANopen)
• CiA 402 (Device Profile for Drives and Motion Control)

Communication objects (COB)


The converter operates with the following communication objects:
• NMT Network management (NMT service) (Page 180)
Network management objects for controlling CANopen communication and for
monitoring the individual nodes on the basis of a master-slave relationship.
• SDO SDO services (Page 183)
Service data objects for reading and changing parameters

• PDO PDO services (Page 187)


Process data objects to transfer process data, TPDO to transmit, RPDO to receive process
data
• SYNC
Synchronization objects
• EMCY
Time stamp and fault messages

Fieldbuses
178 Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG
Communication over CANopen

COB ID
A communication object contains the data to be transferred and a unique 11-bit COB ID. The
COB ID also defines the priority for processing the communication objects. The
communication object with the lowest COB ID always has the highest priority.

COB ID for individual communication objects


You will find the specifications for the COB IDs of the individual communication objects
below:

• COB IDNMT = 0 Cannot be changed


• COB IDSYNC = free Pre-assigned with 80 hex
• COB IDEMCY = free 80 hex + node ID = COB IDEMCY
• COB IDTPDO = free In the free PDO mapping *)
• COB IDRPDO = free In the free PDO mapping *)
• COB IDTSDO = 580 hex + node ID
• COB-IDRSDO = 600 hex + node ID
• COB IDNode Guarding/Heartbeat = 700 hex + node ID

*) Predefined connection set (Page 191)

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 179
Communication over CANopen
6.1 Network management (NMT service)

6.1 Network management (NMT service)


Network management (NMT) is node-oriented and has a master-slave topology.
A node is a master or a slave.
The converter is an NMT slave, and can adopt the following states:
• Boot-up service COB-ID = 700 hex + Node-ID
• Node Control Service COB ID = 0 (see CANopen state diagram)
The transition between two states is realized using NMT services. You can find details on
the NMT services on the Internet:
CiA 301 (Application Layer and Communication Profile) (http://www.can-
cia.org/index.php?id=specifications).
• Error Control Service COB-ID = 700 hex + Node-ID

CANopen state diagram

NMT states
The converter state is displayed in p8685.
You can either change the converter state via the control with an NMT telegram, using one of
the command specifiers listed below, or in the converter itself using p8685.
• Initialization: p8685 = 0, Command specifier = 0
The converter initializes itself after power on. In the factory setting, the converter then
enters the "Pre-Operational" state, which also corresponds to the CANopen standard.
Using p8684, you can set that after the bus has booted, the converter does not go into the
"Pre-Operational" state, but instead into the "Stopped" or "Operational" state.

Fieldbuses
180 Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG
Communication over CANopen
6.1 Network management (NMT service)

• Pre-Operational, p8685 = 127 (factory setting), Command specifier = 128


In this state, the node cannot process any process data (PDO). However, the controller can
use SDO parameters to change or operate the converter, which means that you can also
enter setpoints via SDO.
• Operational, p8685 = 5; Command specifier = 1
In this state, the nodes can process SDO as well as also PDO.
• Stopped, p8685 = 4; Command specifier = 2
In this state, the nodes can neither process PDO nor SDO. The "Stopped" state terminates
one of the following commands:
– Enter Pre-Operational, p8685 = 127 (factory setting), Command specifier = 128
– Start Remote Node
– Reset Node, p8685 = 128, Command specifier = 129
– Reset Communication, p8685 = 129, Command specifier = 130

Note
Sending an incorrect NMT state
If the control sends an incorrect NMT state to the converter, the converter goes into the
"Stopped" state.

Request sent by the master to one or several slaves


The NMT master can simultaneously direct a request to one or more slaves. The following is
applicable:
• Requirement of a slave:
The controller accesses the slave with its node ID (1 - 127).
• Requirement for all slaves:
Node ID = 0

Boot-up Service
The boot-up protocol indicates the state of the NMT slave after it has booted (factory setting
"Pre-operational").
Bootup protocol COB ID = 700 hex + node ID
1 data byte with the value 0 is transmitted.

NMT state after power up


Use parameter p8684 to set the state that the converter goes into after powering up:
• p8684 = 4 Stopped
• p8684 = 5 Operational
• p8684 = 127 Pre-Operational (factory setting)

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 181
Communication over CANopen
6.1 Network management (NMT service)

Node Control Service


The Node Control Services control state transitions
• Start Remote Node:
Command for switching from the "Pre-Operational" communication state to "Operational".
The drive can only transmit and receive process data (PDO) in "Operational" state.
• Stop Remote Node:
Command for switching from "Pre-Operational" or "Operational" to "Stopped". The node
only processes NMT commands in the "Stopped" state.
• Enter Pre-Operational:
Command for switching from "Operational" or "Stopped" to "Pre-Operational". In this state,
the node cannot process any process data (PDO). However, the controller can use SDO
parameters to change or operate the converter, which means that you can also enter
setpoints via SDO.
• Reset Node:
Command for switching from "Operational", "Pre-Operational" or "Stopped" to
"Initialization". When the Reset Node command is issued, the converter resets all the
objects (1000 hex - 9FFF hex) to the state that was present after "Power On".
• Reset Communication:
Command for switching from "Operational", "Pre-Operational" or "Stopped" to
"Initialization". When the Reset Communication command is issued, the converter resets
all the communication objects (1000 hex - 1FFF hex) to the state that was present after
"Power On".
Command specifier and node_ID indicate the transition states and addressed nodes.

Error Control Service


"Node Guarding / Life Guarding" or "Heartbeat" monitor communication.
Setting options and default settings.
Setting the monitoring of the communication (Page 218)

Fieldbuses
182 Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG
Communication over CANopen
6.2 SDO services

6.2 SDO services


You can access the object directory of the connected drive unit using the SDO services. An
SDO connection is a peer-to-peer coupling between an SDO client and a server.
The drive unit with its object directory is an SDO server.
The identifiers for the SDO channel of a drive unit are defined according to CANopen as
follows.

Receiving: Server ⇐ client: COB ID = 600 hex + node ID


Transmitting: Server ⇒ client: COB ID = 580 hex + node ID

Properties
The SDOs have the following properties:
• An SDO connection exists only in the Pre-Operational and Operational states
• Transmission is confirmed
• Asynchronous transmission (matches the acyclical communication via PROFIBUS DB)
• Transmission of values > 4 bytes (normal transfer)
• Transmission of values ≤ 4 bytes (expedited transfer)
• All drive unit parameters can be addressed via SDO

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 183
Communication over CANopen
6.2 SDO services

6.2.1 Access to SINAMICS parameters via SDO


You access SINAMICS parameters using the SDO service. To do this, you use objects 2000
hex … 470F hex of the manufacturer-specific area of the object directory.
Because you cannot directly address all of the parameters using this area, you require for an
SDO job always the parameter number itself and the offset dependent on the parameter
number.

Selection of parameter range and the associated offset

Parameter range Offset Offset value


0 < parameter number < 10000 p8630[2] = 0 0
10000 ≤ parameter number < 20000 p8630[2] = 1 10000
20000 ≤ parameter number < 20000 p8630[2] = 2 20000
30000 ≤ parameter number < 20000 p8630[2] = 3 30000
Calculate object number for an SDO job
The object number for the SDO job is calculated as follows:
object number hex = (number of the converter parameter - offset value) hex + 2000 hex

Examples of object numbers


Parameter Number of the converter parameter - offset Object number
value
Decimal Hexadecimal
● p0010: 10 dec A hex ⇒ 200A hex
● p11000: 1000 dec 3E8 hex ⇒ 23E8 hex
● r20001: 1 dec 1 hex ⇒ 2001 hex
● p31020: 1020 dec 3FC hex ⇒ 23FC hex

Selection, index range


A CANopen object can contain a maximum of 255 indexes. For parameters with more than
255 indexes, you must create additional CANopen objects via p8630[1]. Overall, 1024
indexes are possible.
• p8630[1] = 0: 0 … 255
• p8630[1] = 1: 256 … 511
• p8630[1] = 2: 512 … 767
• p8630[1] = 3: 768 … 1023

Switch-on access to objects of the converter parameters


Access to objects of the converter parameters is activated via p8630[0], where:
• p8630[0] = 0: only access to CANopen objects
• p8630[0] = 1: access to virtual CANopen objects (converter parameters)
• p8630[0] = 2: not relevant for G120 converters
A selection of important manufacturer-specific objects is included in the EDS file.

Fieldbuses
184 Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG
Communication over CANopen
6.2 SDO services

6.2.2 Access PZD objects via SDO

Access to mapped PZD objects


When you access objects mapped via transmit or receive telegrams, you can access the
process data without additional settings.

Overview

Figure 6-1 Access to mapped PZD setpoint objects

Figure 6-2 Access to mapped PZD actual value objects

Example, access to object 6042 hex

Figure 6-3 Access to the process data

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 185
Communication over CANopen
6.2 SDO services

Access to non-mapped PZD objects


When you access objects that are not interconnected via the receive or transmit telegram,
you must also establish the interconnection with the corresponding CANopen parameters.

Overview

Figure 6-4 Access to non-mapped PZD setpoint objects

Figure 6-5 Access to non-mapped free PZD actual value objects

Figure 6-6 Access to non-mapped standardized PZD actual value objects

Example for interconnecting the control word with CANopen parameters:

ON/OFF1 p840[0] = r8795.0


No coast down activated p0844[0] = r8795.1
No fast stop activated p0848[0] = r8795.2
Enable operation p0852[0] = r8795.3
Enable ramp-function genera- p1140[0] = r8795.4
tor
Continue ramp-function gen- p1141[0] = r8795.5
erator
Enable speed setpoint p1142[0] = r8795.6
Acknowledge fault p2103[0] = r8795.7
Stop p8791 = r8795.8

Fieldbuses
186 Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG
Communication over CANopen
6.3 PDO services

6.3 PDO services

Process data objects (PDO)


CANopen transfers the process data using "Process Data Objects" (PDO). There are send PDOs
(TDPO) and receive PDOs (RPDO). CAN controller and converter each exchange up to eight
TPDOs and RPDOs.
PDO communication parameters and PDO mapping parameters define a PDO.
Link the PDO with the elements of the object directory that contain the process data.
Free PDO mapping (Page 193)
Predefined connection set (Page 191) .

Parameter area for PDO RPDO TPDO


In the converter In CANopen In the converter In CANopen
Communication parameters p8700 … p8707 1400 hex … 1407 hex p8720 … p8727 1800 hex … 1807 hex
Mapping parameters p8710 … p8717 1600 hex … 1607 hex p8730 … p8737 1A00 hex …1A07 hex

Structure of the PDO


A PDO consists of communication and mapping parameters. Examples for the structure of the
TPDO and RPDO follow.
Values for communication parameters:
Tables in the Section Object directories (Page 204)

Figure 6-7 Structure of the RPDO and TPDO communication objects

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 187
Communication over CANopen
6.3 PDO services

COB ID
Overview: Communication over CANopen (Page 177).
Calculating the COB IDs: Predefined connection set (Page 191)

Transmission type
For process data objects, the following transmission types are available, which you set in
index 1 of the communication parameter (p8700[1] … p8707[1] / p8720[1] … p8727[1]) in
the converter:
• Synchronous cyclic (value range: 1 … 240)
– TPDO after each n-th SYNC
– RPDO after each n-th SYNC
• Acyclic synchronous (value: 0)
– TPDO when a SYNC is received and a process data has changed in the telegram.
• Cyclic asynchronous (values: 254, 255 + event time)
– TPDO when a process data has changed in the telegram.

Fieldbuses
188 Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG
Communication over CANopen
6.3 PDO services

• Acyclic asynchronous (values: 254, 255)


– TPDO sent in the Event Time interval.
– The controller accepts the RPDO immediately.
• Synchronous data transmission
A periodic synchronization object (SYNC object) ensures that the devices on the CANopen
bus remain synchronized during transmission.
Each PDO transferred as synchronization object must include a "transmission type" 1 ... n:
– Transmission type 1: PDO in each SYNC cycle
– Transmission type n: PDO in every n-th SYNC cycle
The following diagram shows the principle of synchronous and asynchronous
transmission:

Figure 6-8 Principle of synchronous and asynchronous transmission

For synchronous TPDOs, the transmission mode also identifies the transmission rate as a
factor of the SYNC object transmission intervals.
The CAN controller transfers data from synchronous RPDOs that it received after a SYNC
signal only after the next SYNC signal to the converter.

Note
The SYNC signal synchronizes only the communication on the CANopen bus and not
functions in the converter, e.g. the clock times of the speed control.

Inhibit time
The inhibit time defines the minimum interval between two transmissions.

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 189
Communication over CANopen
6.3 PDO services

PDO services
The following services are available for CANopen:
• PDO Write protocol
• PDO Read protocol
SINAMICS converters support the PDO Write protocol

Write PDO
The "PDO Write protocol" service is based on the push model. The PDO has exactly one
producer. There can be no consumer, one consumer, or multiple consumers.
Via Write PDO, the producer of the PDO sends the data of the mapped application object to
the individual consumer.

Fieldbuses
190 Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG
Communication over CANopen
6.3 PDO services

6.3.1 Predefined connection set


If you integrate the converter using the factory setting in CANopen, the converter receives
the control word and the speed setpoint from the controller. The converter returns the status
word and the actual speed value to the controller. These are the settings stipulated in the
Predefined Connection Set.

Figure 6-9 RPDO mapping with the Predefined Connection Set

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 191
Communication over CANopen
6.3 PDO services

Figure 6-10 TPDO mapping with the Predefined Connection Set

Fieldbuses
192 Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG
Communication over CANopen
6.3 PDO services

6.3.2 Free PDO mapping


Using the free PDO mapping, you configure and interconnect any process data as required as
follows:
• as free objects free objects (Page 213) or
• as objects of drive profile CiA 402, corresponding to the requirements of your system for
the PDO service
The precondition is that the converter is set for free PDO mapping (p8744 = 2) (factory
setting).

Configuring and mapping process data using free PDO mapping

Procedure
1. Specify the process data.
Examples:
– Send current actual value (r0068) from the converter to the controller (TPDO -
Transmit Process Data Object)
– Send additional speed setpoint from the controller to the converter (RPDO - Receive
Process Data Object) and write in p1075
2. Specify objects for transmission of the process data
– TPDO1 for the current actual value
– RPDO1 for additional speed setpoint
3. Define the communication parameters for RPDO and TPDO
– Define communication parameters for RPDO.
RPDO communication parameters (Page 206)
– Define communication parameters for TPDO.
See TPDO communication parameters (Page 209)

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 193
Communication over CANopen
6.3 PDO services

4. Select the OV index for the mapping parameters


– Mapping parameters for RPDO.
RPDO mapping parameters (Page 207)
– Mapping parameters for TPDO.
TPDO mapping parameters (Page 211)
5. Write OV index into the SINAMICS mapping parameters
– p8710 … p8717 for RPDO
– p8730 … p8737 for TPDO

Note
Precondition for changing the OD indexes of the SINAMICS mapping parameters
To allow you to change the values of the mapping parameters, you must set the COB ID of
the corresponding parameter to invalid. To do this, add a value of 80000000 hex to the
COB-ID. You must reset the COB-ID to a valid value once you changed the mapping
parameters.

OV index:
Free objects (Page 213)
Objects of the drive profile CiA 402 (Page 214)
You have now configured and mapped the process data.

Fieldbuses
194 Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG
Communication over CANopen
6.3 PDO services

Free RPDO mapping - Overview

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 195
Communication over CANopen
6.3 PDO services

Free TPDO mapping - Overview

Fieldbuses
196 Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG
Communication over CANopen
6.3 PDO services

6.3.3 Interconnect objects from the receive and transmit buffers


To interconnect process data, proceed as follows:

Procedure
1. Create a telegram:
create PDO (parameterize the PDO Com. Parameters and PDO mapping parameters).
Predefined connection set (Page 191)
Free PDO mapping (Page 193)
2. Interconnect parameters:
Interconnect the parameters of the PZD buffer (r2050/r2060, p2051/p2061) corresponding
to the mapping of point "Create telegram" using the mapping table r8750/r8760 or
r8751/r8761. The mapping table indicates the position of a mapped CANopen object in the
PZD buffer.
You have now interconnected the process data.

Interconnecting the receive buffer


The converter writes the received data to the receive buffer:
• PZD receive word 1 … PZD receive word 12 double word in r2060[0] … r2060[10].
• PZD receive word 1 … PZD receive word 12 word in r2050[0] … r2050[11].
• PZD 1 … PZD 4 bit-by-bit in r2090.0 … r2090.15 to r2093.0 … r2093.15
The position of the mapped objects in the receive buffer is displayed in:
• r8760 for double word switching
• r8750 for word switching

Examples

Object Mapped receive Receive word r2050


objects
Control word r8750[0] = 6040 hex Interconnect r2050[0] (PZD1) in p0840.0 = 2090.0
(PZD1) control word 1) p0844.0 = 2090.1
p08484.0 = 2090.
2
p0852.0 = 2090.3
p2130.0 = 2090.7
Torque limit r8750[1] = 5800 hex Interconnect r2050[1] (PZD2) in p1522 = 2050[1]
(PZD2) the torque limit:
Speed setpoint r8750[2] = 6042 hex Interconnect r2050[2] (PZD3) in p1070 = 2050[2]
(PZD3) the speed setpoint:

1) see also p8790, "Automatic CAN control word interconnection"

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 197
Communication over CANopen
6.3 PDO services

Interconnecting the send buffer


The converter transmits the data from the send buffer as follows:
• p2051[0] … p2051[13] in PZD 1 … PZD 14 (indication of the actual values in
r2053[0 … 13])
• p2061[0] … p2061[12] in PZD 1 … PZD 14 (indication of the actual values in
r2063[0 … 12])

Examples

Object Mapped send objects Send word p2051


Status word r8751[0] = 6041 hex Interconnect p2051[0] in PZD1 p2051[0] = r8784
(PZD1)
Current actual r8751[1] = 5810 hex Interconnect PZD2 in the current p2051[1] = r68[1]
value (PZD2) actual value
Actual speed r8751[2] = 6044 hex Interconnect PZD3 in the speed p2051[2] = r63[0]
value (PZD3) actual value

Fieldbuses
198 Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG
Communication over CANopen
6.3 PDO services

6.3.4 Free PDO mapping for example of the actual current value and torque limit
You integrate the actual current value and torque limit into the communication via the free
PDO mapping.
The actual current value and the torque setpoint are transferred in TPDO1 and RPDO1,
respectively. TPDO1 and RPDO1 have already been specified by the Predefined Connection
Set.

Mapping the actual current value (r0068) with TPDO1


Proceed as follows to accept the current actual value as send object in the communication:

Procedure
1. Set the OV index for the actual current value:
first free OV index from the send data from the "Free objects" 5810 table
2. Map the OV index for the actual current value with PZD2:
– Set the COB-ID of TPDO1 to "invalid":
p8720[0] = 800001B2 hex
– Link the mapping parameter object 2 of TPDO1 (p8730.1) with the OV index for the
actual current value:
p8730.1 = 58100010 hex (5810 = OV index, 00 = fixed value, 10 ≙ 16 bit value)
– Set the COB-ID of TPDO1 to "valid":
p8720[0] = 400001B2 hex
r8751 shows which object is matched to which PZD:
PZD2 (r8751[1]) = 5810 (actual current value)
3. link the PZD send word 2 in the send word (p2051) with the actual current value:
p2051[1] = r0086[0]
You have now transferred the actual current value into the communication as the send
object.

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 199
Communication over CANopen
6.3 PDO services

Mapping the torque limit (p1520) with RPDO1


Proceed as follows to accept the torque limit value in the communication:

Procedure
1. Set the OV index for the torque limit:
first free OV index from the receive data from the "Free objects" 5800 table
2. Map the OV index for the torque limit with PZD2
– Set the COB-ID of RPDO1 to "invalid":
p8700[0] = 80000232 hex
– Link the mapping parameter object 2 of RPDO1 (p8710.1) with the OV index for the
torque limit:
p8710.1 = 58000010 hex (5800 = OV index, 00 = fixed value)
– Set the COB-ID of RPDO1 to "valid":
p8700[0] = 40000232 hex
r8750 shows which object is mapped to which PZD:
PZD2 (r8750[1]) = 5800 (torque limit)
3. Link the PZD receive word 2 in the receive word (p2050) with the torque limit:
p2050[1] = p1520[0]
You have now transferred the value for the torque limit into the communication.

Fieldbuses
200 Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG
Communication over CANopen
6.4 CANopen operating modes

6.4 CANopen operating modes


The converter has the following CANopen operating modes

CANopen operating mode SINAMICS


Active Setting 6502 h: Open-loop/closed-loop Control Unit / Value
operating mode in Display control mode converter in
6060 h: the ac- p1300
tive
Value operat-
ing
mode in
Velocity Mode 2 Bit1 U/f control with linear char- x x x 0
acteristic
Manufacturer- -1 Bit16 U/f control with linear char- x x x 1
specific operating acteristic and FCC
mode 1
Manufacturer- -2 Bit17 U/f control with parabolic x x x 2
specific operating characteristic
mode 2
Manufacturer- -3 Bit18 U/f control with parameteriz- X x 3
specific operating able characteristic
mode 3
Manufacturer- -4 Bit19 U/f control with linear char- x x x 4
specific operating acteristic and ECO
mode 4
Manufacturer- -5 Bit20 U/f control for drive requiring X x 5
specific operating a precise frequency (e.g.
mode 5 textiles)
Manufacturer- -6 Bit21 U/f control for drive requiring X x 6
specific operating a precise frequency and FCC
mode 6
Manufacturer- -7 Bit22 U/f control with parabolic x x x 7
specific operating characteristic and ECO
mode 7
Manufacturer- -15 Bit23 Operation with braking resis- x 15
specific operating tor
mode 8
Manufacturer- -19 Bit25 U/f control with independent x x 19
specific operating voltage setpoint
mode 10
Manufacturer- -20 Bit26 Speed control (without en- x x x 20
specific operating coder)
mode 11
Profile Velocity 3 Bit2 Speed control (with encoder) x 21
Mode
Manufacturer- -22 Bit27 Torque control (without x 22
specific operating encoder)
mode 12
Profile Torque 4 Bit3 Closed-loop torque control x 23
Mode (with encoder)

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 201
Communication over CANopen
6.4 CANopen operating modes

Switching the CANopen operating modes

You can also use parameters from other CANopen operating modes, independently from the
current effective CANopen operating mode.

Fieldbuses
202 Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG
Communication over CANopen
6.5 RAM to ROM via the CANopen object 1010

6.5 RAM to ROM via the CANopen object 1010


Save the parameters of the converter EEPROM using CANopen object 1010.
The following options are available:
• 1010.1: Save all parameters - identical with p0971 = 1, or back them up so they are not
lost if the power fails.
• 1010.2: Save communication parameters - not possible via parameter settings!
• 1010.3: Save application parameters - not possible via parameter settings!
If a memory card is inserted, write the parameter settings via the control with object 1010.1
into the EEPROM and to the memory card. You can carry out series commissioning with the
memory card.
For additional information, please refer to the operating instructions, Chapter "Backing up
data and series commissioning"
Overview of the manuals (Page 244),

Note
Save data using objects 1010.2 and 1010.3
Although you can write the communication and/or application parameters to the EEPROM
using objects 1010.2 and 1010.3, you cannot write them to the memory card. This also
means that it is not possible to load the communication data or only the application data
from one converter into the next via the memory card.

Note
With the USB cable inserted, save the data in the converter via the control.
If the converter is connected with a computer via USB but Startdrive cannot access the
converter online, then you cannot save data in the converter using CANopen object 1010.
Withdraw the USB cable from the converter if you wish to save the parameter setting with
object 1010.1 in the converter via the control.

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 203
Communication over CANopen
6.6 Object directories

6.6 Object directories

6.6.1 General objects from the CiA 301 communication profile

Overview
The following table lists the drive-independent communication objects. The "SINAMICS
parameters" column shows the parameter numbers assigned in the converter.

Table 6- 2 Drive-independent communication objects

OD in- Subindex Object name SINAMICS param- Trans- Data Default Can be read/
dex (hex) eters mission type values written
(hex)
1000 Device type r8600 SDO U32 – r
1001 Error register r8601 SDO U8 – r
1003 0...52 hex Predefined error field p8611[0...82] SDO U32 0 r/w
0 Number of errors p8611.0 SDO U32 0 rw
1 Number of module p8611.1 SDO U32 0 r
2 Number of errors: p8611.2 SDO U32 0 r
module 1
3-A Standard error field: p8611.3- p8611.10 SDO U32 0 r
module 1
B Number of errors: p8611.11 SDO U32 0 r
module 2
C-13 Standard error field: p8611.12- SDO U32 0 r
module 2 p8611.19
14 Number of errors: p8611.20 SDO U32 0 r
module 3
15-1C Standard error field: p8611.21- SDO U32 0 r
module 3 p8611.28
1D Number of errors: p8611.29 SDO U32 0 r
module 4
1E-25 Standard error field: p8611.30- SDO U32 0 r
module 4 p8611.37
26 Number of errors: p8611.38 SDO U32 0 r
module 5
27-2E Standard error field: p8611.39- SDO U32 0 r
module 5 p8611.46
2F Number of errors: p8611.47 SDO U32 0 r
module 6
30-37 Standard error field: p8611.48- SDO U32 0 r
module 6 p8611.55
38 Number of errors: p8611.56 SDO U32 0 r
module 7
39-40 Standard error field: p8611.57- SDO U32 0 r
module 7 p8611.64
41 Number of errors: p8611.65 SDO U32 0 r
module 8

Fieldbuses
204 Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG
Communication over CANopen
6.6 Object directories

OD in- Subindex Object name SINAMICS param- Trans- Data Default Can be read/
dex (hex) eters mission type values written
(hex)
42-49 Standard error field: p8611.66- SDO U32 0 r
module 8 p8611.73
4A Number of Control Unit p8611.74 SDO U32 0 r
faults
4B-52 Field Control Unit stand- p8611.75- SDO U32 0 r
ard error p8611.82
1005 SYNCH COB ID p8602 SDO U32 128 rw
1008 Manufacturer device SDO
name
100A Manufacturer software r0018 SDO U32 – r
version
100C Guard time p8604.0 SDO U16 0 rw
100D Lifetime factor p8604.1 SDO U16 0 rw
1010 Store parameters p0971 SDO U16 0 rw
0 Largest subindex sup- SDO
ported
1 Save all parameters p0971 SDO U16 0 rw
2 Save communication p0971 SDO U16 0 rw
parameters (0x1000-
0x1fff)
3 Save application-related p0971 SDO U16 0 rw
parameters (0x6000-
0x9fff)
1011 Restore default parame- p0970 SDO U16 0 rw
ters
0 Largest subindex sup- SDO
ported
1 Restore all default pa- p0970 SDO U16 0 rw
rameters
2 Restore communication p0970 SDO U16 0 rw
default parameters
(0x1000-0x1fff)
3 Restore application de- p0970 SDO U16 0 rw
fault parameters
(0x6000-0x9fff)
1014 COB ID emergency p8603 SDO U32 0 rw
1017 Producer heartbeat time p8606 SDO U16 0 rw
1018 Identy Object r8607[0...3] U32 – r
0 Number of entries SDO
1 Vendor ID r8607.0 SDO U32 – r
2 Product code r8607.1 SDO U32 – r
3 Revision number r8607.2 SDO U32 – r
4 Serial number r8607.3 SDO U32 0 r
1027 Module list
0 Number of entries r0102 SDO U16 – r
1-8 Module ID p0107[0...15] SDO I16 0 rw
1029 Error behavior
0 Number of error classes SDO

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 205
Communication over CANopen
6.6 Object directories

OD in- Subindex Object name SINAMICS param- Trans- Data Default Can be read/
dex (hex) eters mission type values written
(hex)
1 Communication Error p8609.0 SDO U32 1 rw
2 Device profile or manu- p8609.1 SDO U32 1 rw
facturer-specific error
1200 1st server SDO parameter
0 Number of entries SDO
1 COB ID client -> server r8610.0 SDO U32 – r
(rx)
2 COB ID server -> client r8610.1 SDO U32 – r
(tx)

RPDO configuration objects


The following tables list the communication and mapping parameters together with the
indexes for the individual RPDO configuration objects. The configuration objects are
established via SDO. The "SINAMICS parameters" column shows the parameter numbers
assigned in the converter.

Table 6- 3 RPDO configuration objects - communication parameters

OD Sub- Name of the object SINAMICS Data Predefined con- Can be


Index in- parame- type nection set read/
(hex) dex ters written
(hex) to
1400 Receive PDO 1 communication parameter
0 Largest subindex supported U8 2 r
1 COB ID used by PDO p8700.0 U32 200 hex + node ID r/w
2 Transmission type p8700.1 U8 FE hex r/w
1401 Receive PDO 2 communication parameter
0 Largest subindex supported U8 2 r
1 COB ID used by PDO p8701.0 U32 300 hex + node ID r/w
2 Transmission type p8701.1 U8 FE hex r/w
1402 Receive PDO 3 communication parameter
0 Largest subindex supported U8 2 r
1 COB ID used by PDO p8702.0 U32 8000 06DF hex r/w
2 Transmission type p8702.1 U8 FE hex r/w
1403 Receive PDO 4 communication parameter
0 Largest subindex supported U8 2 r
1 COB ID used by PDO p8703.0 U32 8000 06DF hex r/w
2 Transmission type p8703.1 U8 FE hex r/w
1404 Receive PDO 5 communication parameter
0 Largest subindex supported U8 2 r
1 COB ID used by PDO p8704.0 U32 8000 06DF hex r/w
2 Transmission type p8704.1 U8 FE hex r/w

Fieldbuses
206 Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG
Communication over CANopen
6.6 Object directories

OD Sub- Name of the object SINAMICS Data Predefined con- Can be


Index in- parame- type nection set read/
(hex) dex ters written
(hex) to
1405 Receive PDO 6 communication parameter
0 Largest subindex supported U8 2 r
1 COB ID used by PDO p8705.0 U32 8000 06DF hex r/w
2 Transmission type p8705.1 U8 FE hex r/w
1406 Receive PDO 7 communication parameter
0 Largest subindex supported U8 2 r
1 COB ID used by PDO p8706.0 U32 8000 06DF hex r/w
2 Transmission type p8706.1 U8 FE hex r/w
1407 Receive PDO 8 communication parameter
0 Largest subindex supported U8 2 r
1 COB ID used by PDO p8707.0 U32 8000 06DF hex r/w
2 Transmission type p8707.1 U8 FE hex r/w

Table 6- 4 RPDO configuration objects - mapping parameters

OD Sub- Name of the object SINAMICS Data Predefined Can be


index index parame- type connection read/
(hex) (hex) ters set written to
1600 Receive PDO 1 mapping parameter
0 Number of mapped application objects in PDO U8 1 r
1 PDO mapping for the first application object to be p8710.0 U32 6040 hex r/w
mapped
2 PDO mapping for the second application object to p8710.1 U32 0 r/w
be mapped
3 PDO mapping for the third application object to p8710.2 U32 0 r/w
be mapped
4 PDO mapping for the fourth application object to p8710.3 U32 0 r/w
be mapped
1601 Receive PDO 2 mapping parameter
0 Number of mapped application objects in PDO U8 2 r
1 PDO mapping for the first application object to be p8711.0 U32 6040 hex r/w
mapped
2 PDO mapping for the second application object to p8711.1 U32 6042 hex r/w
be mapped
3 PDO mapping for the third application object to p8711.2 U32 0 r/w
be mapped
4 PDO mapping for the fourth application object to p8711.3 U32 0 r/w
be mapped

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 207
Communication over CANopen
6.6 Object directories

OD Sub- Name of the object SINAMICS Data Predefined Can be


index index parame- type connection read/
(hex) (hex) ters set written to
1602 Receive PDO 3 mapping parameter
0 Number of mapped application objects in PDO U8 0 r
1 PDO mapping for the first application object to be p8712.0 U32 0 r/w
mapped
2 PDO mapping for the second application object to p8712.1 U32 0 r/w
be mapped
3 PDO mapping for the third application object to p8712.2 U32 0 r/w
be mapped
4 PDO mapping for the fourth application object to p8712.3 U32 0 r/w
be mapped
1603 Receive PDO 4 mapping parameter
0 Number of mapped application objects in PDO U8 0 r
1 PDO mapping for the first application object to be p8713.0 U32 0 r/w
mapped
2 PDO mapping for the second application object to p8713.1 U32 0 r/w
be mapped
3 PDO mapping for the third application object to p8713.2 U32 0 r/w
be mapped
4 PDO mapping for the fourth application object to p8713.3 U32 0 r/w
be mapped
1604 Receive PDO 5 mapping parameter
0 Number of mapped application objects in PDO U8 0 r
1 PDO mapping for the first application object to be p8714.0 U32 0 r/w
mapped
2 PDO mapping for the second application object to p8714.1 U32 0 r/w
be mapped
3 PDO mapping for the third application object to p8714.2 U32 0 r/w
be mapped
4 PDO mapping for the fourth application object to p8714.3 U32 0 r/w
be mapped
1605 Receive PDO 6 mapping parameter
0 Number of mapped application objects in PDO U8 0 r
1 PDO mapping for the first application object to be p8715.0 U32 0 r/w
mapped
2 PDO mapping for the second application object to p8715.1 U32 0 r/w
be mapped
3 PDO mapping for the third application object to p8715.2 U32 0 r/w
be mapped
4 PDO mapping for the fourth application object to p8715.3 U32 0 r/w
be mapped
1606 Receive PDO 7 mapping parameter
0 Number of mapped application objects in PDO U8 0 r
1 PDO mapping for the first application object to be p8716.0 U32 0 r/w
mapped
2 PDO mapping for the second application object to p8716.1 U32 0 r/w
be mapped
3 PDO mapping for the third application object to p8716.2 U32 0 r/w
be mapped

Fieldbuses
208 Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG
Communication over CANopen
6.6 Object directories

OD Sub- Name of the object SINAMICS Data Predefined Can be


index index parame- type connection read/
(hex) (hex) ters set written to
4 PDO mapping for the fourth application object to p8716.3 U32 0 r/w
be mapped
1607 Receive PDO 8 mapping parameter
0 Number of mapped application objects in PDO U8 0 r
1 PDO mapping for the first application object to be p8717.0 U32 0 r/w
mapped
2 PDO mapping for the second application object to p8717.1 U32 0 r/w
be mapped
3 PDO mapping for the third application object to p8717.2 U32 0 r/w
be mapped
4 PDO mapping for the fourth application object to p8717.3 U32 0 r/w
be mapped

TPDO configuration objects


The following tables list the communication and mapping parameters together with the
indexes for the individual TPDO configuration objects. The configuration objects are
established via SDO. The "SINAMICS parameters" column shows the parameter numbers
assigned in the converter.

Table 6- 5 TPDO configuration objects - communication parameters

OD Sub- Object name SINAMICS Data Predefined con- Can be


index in- parameters type nection set read/
(hex) dex written
(hex)
1800 Transmit PDO 1 communication parameter
0 Largest subindex supported U8 5 r
1 COB ID used by PDO p8720.0 U32 180 hex + node r/w
ID
2 Transmission type p8720.1 U8 FE hex r/w
3 Inhibit time p8720.2 U16 0 r/w
4 Reserved p8720.3 U8 --- r/w
5 Event timer p8720.4 U16 0 r/w
1801 Transmit PDO 2 communication parameter
0 Largest subindex supported U8 5 r
1 COB ID used by PDO p8721.0 U32 280 hex + node r/w
ID
2 Transmission type p8721.1 U8 FE hex r/w
3 Inhibit time p8721.2 U16 0 r/w
4 Reserved p8721.3 U8 --- r/w
5 Event timer p8721.4 U16 0 r/w
1802 Transmit PDO 3 communication parameter
0 Largest subindex supported U8 5 r
1 COB ID used by PDO p8722.0 U32 C000 06DF hex r/w
2 Transmission type p8722.1 U8 FE hex r/w

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 209
Communication over CANopen
6.6 Object directories

OD Sub- Object name SINAMICS Data Predefined con- Can be


index in- parameters type nection set read/
(hex) dex written
(hex)
3 Inhibit time p8722.2 U16 0 r/w
4 Reserved p8722.3 U8 --- r/w
5 Event timer p8722.4 U16 0 r/w
1803 Transmit PDO 4 communication parameter
0 Largest subindex supported U8 5 r
1 COB ID used by PDO p8723.0 U32 C000 06DF hex r/w
2 Transmission type p8723.1 U8 FE hex r/w
3 Inhibit time p8723.2 U16 0 r/w
4 Reserved p8723.3 U8 --- r/w
5 Event timer p8723.4 U16 0 r/w
1804 Transmit PDO 5 communication parameter
0 Largest subindex supported U8 5 r
1 COB ID used by PDO p8724.0 U32 C000 06DF hex r/w
2 Transmission type p8724.1 U8 FE hex r/w
3 Inhibit time p8724.2 U16 0 r/w
4 Reserved p8724.3 U8 --- r/w
5 Event timer p8724.4 U16 0 r/w
1805 Transmit PDO 6 communication parameter
0 Largest subindex supported U8 5 r
1 COB ID used by PDO p8725.0 U32 C000 06DF hex r/w
2 Transmission type p8725.1 U8 FE hex r/w
3 Inhibit time p8725.2 U16 0 r/w
4 Reserved p8725.3 U8 --- r/w
5 Event timer p8725.4 U16 0 r/w
1806 Transmit PDO 7 communication parameter
0 Largest subindex supported U8 5 r
1 COB ID used by PDO p8726.0 U32 C000 06DF hex r/w
2 Transmission type p8726.1 U8 FE hex r/w
3 Inhibit time p8726.2 U16 0 r/w
4 Reserved p8726.3 U8 --- r/w
5 Event timer p8726.4 U16 0 r/w
1807 Transmit PDO 8 communication parameter
0 Largest subindex supported U8 5 r
1 COB ID used by PDO p8727.0 U32 C000 06DF hex r/w
2 Transmission type p8727.1 U8 FE hex r/w
3 Inhibit time p8727.2 U16 0 r/w
4 Reserved p8727.3 U8 --- r/w
5 Event timer p8727.4 U16 0 r/w

Fieldbuses
210 Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG
Communication over CANopen
6.6 Object directories

Table 6- 6 TPDO configuration objects - mapping parameters

OD Sub- Object name SINAMICS Data type Predefined Can be


index index parame- connection read/
(hex) (hex) ters set written
1A00 Transmit PDO 1 mapping parameter
0 Number of mapped application objects in PDO U8 1 r/w
1 PDO mapping for the first application object to be p8730.0 U32 6041 hex r/w
mapped
2 PDO mapping for the second application object to p8730.1 U32 0 r/w
be mapped
3 PDO mapping for the third application object to be p8730.2 U32 0 r/w
mapped
4 PDO mapping for the fourth application object to p8730.3 U32 0 r/w
be mapped
1A01 Transmit PDO 2 mapping parameter
0 Number of mapped application objects in PDO U8 2 r/w
1 PDO mapping for the first application object to be p8731.0 U32 6041 hex r/w
mapped
2 PDO mapping for the second application object to p8731.1 U32 6044 hex r/w
be mapped
3 PDO mapping for the third application object to be p8731.2 U32 0 r/w
mapped
4 PDO mapping for the fourth application object to p8731.3 U32 0 r/w
be mapped
1A02 Transmit PDO 3 mapping parameter
0 Number of mapped application objects in PDO U8 0 r/w
1 PDO mapping for the first application object to be p8732.0 U32 0 r/w
mapped
2 PDO mapping for the second application object to p8732.1 U32 0 r/w
be mapped
3 PDO mapping for the third application object to be p8732.2 U32 0 r/w
mapped
4 PDO mapping for the fourth application object to p8732.3 U32 0 r/w
be mapped
1A03 Transmit PDO 4 mapping parameter
0 Number of mapped application objects in PDO U8 0 r/w
1 PDO mapping for the first application object to be p8733.0 U32 0 r/w
mapped
2 PDO mapping for the second application object to p8733.1 U32 0 r/w
be mapped
3 PDO mapping for the third application object to be p8733.2 U32 0 r/w
mapped
4 PDO mapping for the fourth application object to p8733.3 U32 0 r/w
be mapped

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 211
Communication over CANopen
6.6 Object directories

OD Sub- Object name SINAMICS Data type Predefined Can be


index index parame- connection read/
(hex) (hex) ters set written
1A04 Transmit PDO 5 mapping parameter
0 Number of mapped application objects in PDO U8 0 r
1 PDO mapping for the first application object to be p8734.0 U32 0 r/w
mapped
2 PDO mapping for the second application object to p8734.1 U32 0 r/w
be mapped
3 PDO mapping for the third application object to be p8734.2 U32 0 r/w
mapped
4 PDO mapping for the fourth application object to p8734.3 U32 0 r/w
be mapped
1A05 Transmit PDO 6 mapping parameter
0 Number of mapped application objects in PDO U8 0 r/w
1 PDO mapping for the first application object to be p8735.0 U32 0 r/w
mapped
2 PDO mapping for the second application object to p8735.1 U32 0 r/w
be mapped
3 PDO mapping for the third application object to be p8735.2 U32 0 r/w
mapped
4 PDO mapping for the fourth application object to p8735.3 U32 0 r/w
be mapped
1A06 Transmit PDO 7 mapping parameter
0 Number of mapped application objects in PDO U8 0 r
1 PDO mapping for the first application object to be p8736.0 U32 0 r/w
mapped
2 PDO mapping for the second application object to p8736.1 U32 0 r/w
be mapped
3 PDO mapping for the third application object to be p8736.2 U32 0 r/w
mapped
4 PDO mapping for the fourth application object to p8736.3 U32 0 r/w
be mapped
1A07 Transmit PDO 8 mapping parameter
0 Number of mapped application objects in PDO U8 0 r
1 PDO mapping for the first application object to be p8737.0 U32 0 r/w
mapped
2 PDO mapping for the second application object to p8737.1 U32 0 r/w
be mapped
3 PDO mapping for the third application object to be p8737.2 U32 0 r/w
mapped
4 PDO mapping for the fourth application object to p8737.3 U32 0 r/w
be mapped

Fieldbuses
212 Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG
Communication over CANopen
6.6 Object directories

6.6.2 Free objects


You can interconnect any process data objects of the receive and transmit buffer using
receive and transmit double words.
• Scaling for percentage values:
– 16-bit (word): 4000 hex ≙ 100%
– 32-bit (doubleword) 4000000 hex ≙ 100%
• Scaling for values referred to units:
– 16-bit (word): 4000 hex ≙ value of the corresponding reference parameter for p200x
– 32-bit (double word) 4000000 hex ≙ Value of the corresponding reference parameter
for p200x
Example:
– For temperature values: 16-bit (word): 4000 hex ≙ p2006
– For temperature values: 32-bit (doubleword): 4000000 hex ≙ p2006
The "SINAMICS parameters" column shows the parameter numbers assigned in the converter.
The assignment applies to the case in which an object which is not mapped in any PDO is to
be accessed via SDO.

OD index Description Data Default set- Can be writ- SINAMICS


(hex) type ting ten to-/ parameters
per PZD read
5800 … 580F 16 freely-interconnectable receive process data I16 0 r/w r8745[0 … 15
]
5810 … 581F 16 freely-interconnectable transmit process I16 0 r r8746[0 … 15
data ]
5820 … 5827 8 freely-interconnectable receive process data I32 0 r/w r8747[0 … 7]
5828 … 582F Reserved
5830 … 5837 8 freely-interconnectable transmit process data I32 0 r r8748[0 … 7]
5828 … 582F Reserved

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 213
Communication over CANopen
6.6 Object directories

6.6.3 Objects from the CiA 402 drive profile


The following table lists the object directory with the index of the individual objects for the
drives. The "SINAMICS parameters" column shows the parameter numbers assigned in the
converter.

OD in- Sub- Name of the object SINAMICS Transmission Data Default Can be
dex in- parameters type setting read/
(hex) dex written
(hex)
Predefinitions
67FF Single device type SDO U32 r
Common entries in the object dictionary
6007 Abort connection option code p8641 SDO I16 3 r/w
6502 Supported drive modes SDO I32 r
6504 Drive manufacturer SDO String SIEMENS r
Device control
6040 Control word r8795 PDO/SDO U16 – r/w
6041 Status word r8784 PDO/SDO U16 – r
605D Halt option code p8791 PDO/SDO I16 – r/w
6060 Modes of operation p1300 SDO I8 – r/w
6061 Modes of operation display r8762 SDO I8 – r
Factor group
6094 Velocity encoder factor SDO U8 - r
01 velocity encoder factor p8798[1] SDO U32 1 r/w
numerator
02 velocity encoder factor p8798[2] SDO U32 1 r/w
denumerator
Profile velocity mode
6063 Actual position value r0482 SDO/PDO I32 – r
6069 Velocity sensor actual value r0061 SDO/PDO I32 – r
606B Velocity demand value r1170 SDO/PDO I32 – r
606C Velocity actual value r0063 SDO/PDO I32 – r
Actual velocity
6083 Profile acceleration p1082/p1120 SDO I32 – r/w
6084 Profile deceleration p1082/p1121 SDO I32 0 r/w
6085 Quick stop deceleration p1082/p1135 SDO I32 0 r/w
6086 Motion profile type p1115/p1134 SDO I32 0 r/w
60FF Target velocity p1155[0] 1) SDO/PDO I32 0 r/w
Set velocity p1072 2)
Profile Torque Mode 3)
6071 Target torque r8797 SDO/PDO I16 – r/w
torque setpoint
6072 Max. torque p1520 SDO 0 0
6074 Torque demand value r0079 SDO/PDO I16 – r
overall torque setpoint
6077 Torque actual value r0080 SDO/PDO I16 – r

Fieldbuses
214 Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG
Communication over CANopen
6.6 Object directories

OD in- Sub- Name of the object SINAMICS Transmission Data Default Can be
dex in- parameters type setting read/
(hex) dex written
(hex)
Velocity mode
6042 vl target velocity r8792 SDO/PDO I16 – r/w
6043 vl velocity demand r1170 SDO/PDO I16 – r
6044 vl velocity actual value r0063 SDO/PDO I16 – r
6046 0 vl velocity min./max. amount SDO U8 – r
1 vl velocity min. amount p1080 SDO U32 – r/w
2 vl velocity max. amount p1082 SDO U32 – r/w
6048 0 vl velocity acceleration SDO U8 – r
1 Delta speed p1082 SDO U32 – r/w
2 Delta time p1120 SDO U16 – r/w

1) Without ramp-function generator


2) With ramp-function generator
3) The converter can process the objects from the Profile Torque Mode. But they cannot be set nor selected in converters.

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 215
Communication over CANopen
6.7 Integrating the converter into CANopen

6.7 Integrating the converter into CANopen

Commissioning

Requirement

• Startdrive is installed on the computer used to


commission the system.
• The converter is connected to a CANopen master.
• The EDS (Electronic Data Sheet) is installed on your
CANopen master.
• The converter interfaces have been set to the CANopen
fieldbus during basic commissioning.
This means that the following signals in the converter
are interconnected corresponding to the Predefined
Connection Sets:
– Speed setpoint and control word
– Speed actual value and status word

You can find the EDS on the Internet:


EDS (electronic data sheet)
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/48351511)

Procedure
1. Connecting converter to CAN bus (Page 217)

2. Set the node ID, baud rate and the communication monitoring.
Setting the node ID and baud rate (Page 217)"
Setting the monitoring of the communication (Page 218)"
3. Interconnect additional process data
Set p8744 = 2. You can now interconnect other process data.
Free PDO mapping (Page 193)"
4. Signal interconnection of the links created in free PDO mapping.
Interconnect objects from the receive and transmit buffers (Page 197).
5. Exit commissioning
This is carried out in Startdrive in the commissioning wizard.
You have now commissioned the CANopen interface.
Further information about configuring the communication:
Communication over CANopen (Page 177)
Object directories (Page 204).

Fieldbuses
216 Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG
Communication over CANopen
6.7 Integrating the converter into CANopen

6.7.1 Connecting converter to CAN bus


Connect the converter to the fieldbus via the 9-pin SUB-D pin connector.
The connections of this pin connector are short-circuit proof and isolated. If the converter
forms the first or last slave in the CANopen network, then you must switch-in the bus-
terminating resistor.
For additional information, refer to the operating instructions of the Control Unit.

6.7.2 Setting the node ID and baud rate

Node ID
Valid value range: 1 … 127
You have the following options for setting the node ID:
• Using the address switch on the Control Unit:

Figure 6-11 Address switch with example for bus address 10

The address switch has priority over the other settings.


• Using Startdrive or an operator panel via parameter p8620 (default setting: p8620 = 126)
It is only possible to change p8620 if the address 0 is set in the address switch.
If you are working with Startdrive, back up the settings so they are not lost if the power
fails.
The position of the address switch can be found in the operating instructions for the
converter.
Manuals and technical support (Page 244)

Setting the baud rate


You can set the baud rate using parameter p8622. If you are working with Startdrive, back up
the settings so they are not lost if the power fails.
Setting range: 10 kbps … 1 Mbps. The maximum permissible cable length for 1 Mbps is 40 m.

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 217
Communication over CANopen
6.7 Integrating the converter into CANopen

Activating node ID or baud rate

Procedure
To activate the changed node ID or baud rate, proceed as follows:
1. Switch off the converter supply voltage.
2. Wait until all LEDs on the converter are dark.
3. Switch the converter supply voltage on again.
Your settings become effective after switching on.
You have now activated the changed settings.

6.7.3 Setting the monitoring of the communication

To monitor the communication, use one of the following methods:


• Node guarding / life guarding

• Heartbeat

Node guarding / life guarding

Principle of operation
• Node guarding:
Is always active if heartbeat is not activated (p8606 = 0). Node guarding means the
master sends monitoring queries to the converter which then answers.
The converter does not monitor the communication. Set the responses to a bus failure in
the master.
• Life guarding:
is active if you use p8604.0 and p8604.1 to set a lifetime ≠ 0.
Life Guarding means that the converter monitors the master's monitoring query and
reports fault F8700 (A) with fault value 2, if a life guarding protocol (life guarding event)
is not received within the lifetime. Set additional responses to a bus failure in the master.
Calculate value for lifetime
Life time = guard time in milliseconds (p8604.0) * life time factor (p8604.1)

Fieldbuses
218 Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG
Communication over CANopen
6.7 Integrating the converter into CANopen

Heartbeat

Principle of operation
The slave periodically sends heartbeat messages. Other slaves and the master can monitor
this signal. In the master, set the responses for the case that the heartbeat does not come.

Setting value for heartbeat


Set in p8606 the cycle time for the heartbeat in milliseconds.

Converter behavior with a bus fault


With a bus fault, the CAN master goes to the "Bus OFF" status. In the converter, set the
response to the bus error using parameter p8641. Factory setting: p8641 = 3 (AUS3).
If you have resolved the bus error, then you have the following options to restart
communication:
• You switch off the converter power supply, wait until all of the LEDs on the converter go
dark, and then you switch on the converter power supply again.
This means that you withdraw the bus state and restart communication.
• You acknowledge the bus error via DI 2 or directly via p3981 and start the communication
either
– Manually by setting p8608[0] = 1. After starting, p8608 is internally set back to 0.
– Automatically every two seconds. To do this, you must have set p8608[1] to 1 when
commissioning.

WARNING
OFF command not effective as a result of a bus fault
When the bus has a fault condition, the higher-level control cannot access the converter. If,
as a response to a bus fault p8641 = 0 (no response) is set, then the motor remains
switched-on - even if the higher-level control sends an OFF command to the converter.
• Configure an additional OFF command via terminals.

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 219
Communication over CANopen
6.8 Error diagnostics

6.8 Error diagnostics

Objects to signal and describe errors and operating states


The following options are available to display errors and operating states:
• Display of the operating state using LEDs
• Display of the operating state using the alarm object (Emergency Object)
– Converter-specific error list (predefined error field)
– CANopen error register (error register)

Description of the LED symbols for CANopen

LED is bright

LED flashes slowly

LED flashes quickly

LED flashes in the "single flash" mode

LED flashes in the "double flash" mode

LED flashes with variable frequency

Fieldbuses
220 Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG
Communication over CANopen
6.8 Error diagnostics

Table 6- 7 CANopen fieldbus

BF Explanation
Data exchange between the converter and control system is active ("Operational" state)

Fieldbus is in the "Pre-operational" state

Fieldbus is in the "Stopped" state

No fieldbus available
RDY When LED RDY flashes simultaneously:
Firmware update failed

Alarm - limit reached

Error event in the higher-level control system (Error Control Event)

Converter waits until the power supply is switched off and switched on again after a firm-
ware update

Incorrect memory card or unsuccessful firmware update

Firmware update is active

Display of the operating state using the alarm object (Emergency Object)
Error states are displayed using the alarm object (Emergency Object), OV index 1014 in the
emergency telegram. It has the following structure:

• Bytes 0 and 1: CANopen error code


• Byte 2: Codes for the CANopen error register
• Byte 5: Number of the drive object. For G120 converters, this is always = 1

Errors trigger an emergency telegram and cause the drive to shut down.
You can suppress the emergency telegram by setting bit 31 in object 1014 hex to 1.
This means that shutdown is not suppressed, however the fault message is not sent to the
master.

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 221
Communication over CANopen
6.8 Error diagnostics

Converter-specific error list (predefined error field)


You can read out the converter-specific error list using the following objects:
• OV index 1003 hex
• Converter parameter p8611
It includes the alarms and faults present in the converter in the CANopen alarm number
range 8700-8799.
The errors are listed in the order in which they occur using an error code and additional,
device-specific information.
As soon as a fault is acknowledged or an alarm is resolved, they are deleted from the
converter-specific error list.
You acknowledge all of the active converter errors by setting subindex 0 in the OV index
1003 to 0 or setting p8611[0] = 0.

Table 6- 8 CANopen error code

Error code Meaning Explanation


0000 hex No error present Successful acknowledgement of all errors or all the alarms are
cleared in the display.
1000 hex CAN Error 1 All other SINAMICS faults/errors
1001 hex CAN Error 2 All other CANopen alarms in the alarm number range
F08700 to F08799
8110 hex CAN overflow, mes- CBC: Telegram loss (A(N)08751) [alarm]
sage lost
8120 hex CAN Error Passive CBC: Error number for Error Passive exceeded (A08752)
[alarm]
8130 hex CAN Life Guard Error CBC: Communications error, alarm value 2 F08700(A) [er-
ror/alarm]

CANopen error register (error register)


You can read out the error register using the following objects:
• OV index 1001 hex
• Converter parameter r8601
It indicates the error in byte 2 of the emergency telegram.

Table 6- 9 CANopen Error Register

Error Regis- Meaning Explanation


ter
Bit 0 Generic error Set for every alarm that CAN identifies.
Bit 4 Communication Is set for CAN communication alarms (alarms in the range
error 08700 … 08799).
Bit 7 Manufacturer Is set for all alarms outside the range 08700 … 08799.
error

Fieldbuses
222 Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG
Communication over CANopen
6.8 Error diagnostics

Response in the case of an error


For a CAN communication error, e.g. too many telegram failures, the converter outputs fault
F(A)08700(2).
For further information, please refer to the List Manual of your converter.
Overview of the manuals (Page 244)).

You set the response of the CAN node in p8609.


• p8609 = 0 Pre-operational
• p8609 = 1 No change (factory setting)
• p8609 = 2 Stopped
You set the converter response in p8641:
• p8641 = 0 No reaction (factory setting)
• p8641 = 1 OFF1
• p8641 = 2 OFF2
• p8641 = 3 OFF3

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 223
Communication over CANopen
6.9 CAN bus sampling time

6.9 CAN bus sampling time


The CAN bus sampling time is 4 ms. The converter can send and receive telegrams within this
time frame.

Receive telegrams cycle time


• For cyclic receive telegrams, the cycle time must be greater than twice the sampling time.
Telegrams could be lost if the cycle time is any less than this. In this case, warning A08751
appears.
• With receive telegrams for which data does not change faster than twice the sampling
time, it is possible to set a cycle time shorter than twice the sampling time if your
application permits telegrams to be lost in the process.
An A08751 warning can be avoided by changing the message type to "No message" via
parameters p2118 and p2119.

Fieldbuses
224 Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG
Communication over CANopen
6.9 CAN bus sampling time

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 225
Communication via AS-i – only for G110M and
G115D 7
General information
The converter operates based on the extended AS-i specification V3.0.
The signaling is made as Manchester-coded current pulses superimposed on the 28 V supply.
Decouple the 28 V supply with inductances so that the receivers can decouple the transferred
messages.
The Control Unit power consumption is approx. 90 mA provided you do not use any digital or
analog inputs. When you use digital and analog inputs, the power requirement can be as high
as 300 mA.
The converter supports the Single Slave and Dual Slave modes.
In Single Slave mode, the converter has an address in the AS-i network over which four bits
are transferred. In Dual Slave mode, each converter has two AS-i addresses over each of
which four bits are transferred.
In the Single Slave mode, communication is realized in accordance with protocol 7.F.E. In the
Dual Slave mode, communication is realized in accordance with protocols 7.A.5 and 7.A.E.

Default settings for commissioning


To configure the communication of the converter via AS-i, the following options are available
for commissioning the converter: Using parameter p0015, select which default setting you
wish to accept:

Table 7- 1 p0015 (macro drive unit)

p0015 = Designation Meaning


30 Default setting 30 - single slave mode, standard ad- Single slave mode, where the control system specifies
dressing a fixed frequency
31 Default setting 31 - dual slave mode with fixed set- Dual slave mode, where the control system specifies a
points fixed frequency
32 Default setting 32 - single slave mode, modified ad- Default setting 32 - Single Slave mode, modified ad-
dressing dressing:
34 Default setting 34 - dual slave mode with "ON/OFF1", Dual Slave mode with "ON/OFF1", "OFF2", speed set-
"OFF2" point from the control system

Details about the default settings are provided in the operating instructions of your converter.
Overview of the manuals (Page 244)

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 227
Communication via AS-i – only for G110M and G115D

Connection
The following table shows the AS-i plug assignment.

Table 7- 2 Pin assignment

X03 AS-i (M12) Pin Function Description


1 AS-i + AS-i plus signal
2 0V Reference potential for terminal 4
3 AS-i - AS-i minus signal
4 24 V 24 V auxiliary voltage
5 Not assigned

Requirement for applications in the USA and Canada


Use an external 24 V power supply with one of the following specifications:
• NEC Class 2
• Voltage/current-limited

More information
You can find more information about connection in the AS-Interface System Manual.
Overview of the manuals (Page 244)

Fieldbuses
228 Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG
Communication via AS-i – only for G110M and G115D
7.1 Setting the address

7.1 Setting the address


As factory setting, all AS-i slaves have address 0. Slaves with address 0 are not included in the
communication.
The addresses must be unique, although they can be mixed as required.
You have the following options when making the address assignment:
• Automatic addressing via the AS-i master
• Addressing via the addressing device
• Addressing via parameters
Before you set the address, you must specify whether the converter is integrated as Single
Slave or Dual Slave in the AS-i network.
• p2013 = 0: Single Slave (factory setting)
• p2013 = 2: Dual Slave
If for the commissioning you select the default setting 30 or 32 (Single Slave), or 31 or 34
(Dual Slave), p2013 is assigned the appropriate value.

Note
Changes made to p2012 and p2013
Changes made to the p2012 and p2013 parameters take effect immediately after the change.
If you work with Startdrive, you must back up the changes so they are not lost when the
system is switched off and on again.

Automatic addressing via the AS-i master

Single Slave
For automatic addressing, the address is specified by the AS-i master. For a Single Slave, the
master checks which slave has address 0 and assigns it the next free address. This address is
also written to parameter p2012. If more than one slave has address 0, an automatic
addressing is not possible.

Dual Slave
For automatic addressing, the address is specified by the AS-i master. If both slaves have
address 0, the second slave is hidden and the control assigns a valid address for slave 1.
Slave 2 then becomes visible with address 0 and can be addressed.
Automatic addressing is not always possible for older AS-i masters. In this case, use the
manual addressing and set the address from an addressing device, via Startdrive or from an
operator panel on the converter.
You can find more information in the AS-Interface System Manual, "Setting the AS-i address"
section.
Overview of the manuals (Page 244)

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 229
Communication via AS-i – only for G110M and G115D
7.1 Setting the address

Addressing via the addressing device (e.g. 3RK1904-2AB02)


Addressing via the addressing device is made offline.
You can find more information
• in the AS-Interface System Manual, "Setting the AS-i address" section
• G115D Operating Instructions, "Using an AS-i addressing unit" section
Overview of the manuals (Page 244)

Addressing via parameters


The address assignment is made with the p2012[0] and p2012[1] parameters.
If you assign the address via Startdrive, you must back up the settings so that they are not
lost if the power fails.
• Address range for Single Slave converter, profile 7.F.E
– p2012[1]: 0 … 31, range for the A address, 0A … 31A
• Address range for Dual Slave converter, profile 7.A.5 or 7.A.E
– p2012[0]: 0 … 31, 33 … 63 for slave 1:
– p2012[1]: 0 … 31, 33 … 63 for slave 2:
with
– 0 … 31 range for the A address, 0A … 31A
– 33 … 63 range for B address, 1B … 31B

Fieldbuses
230 Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG
Communication via AS-i – only for G110M and G115D
7.2 Single Slave mode

7.2 Single Slave mode


In Single Slave mode, four bits are available for the communication between the AS-i master
and the converter. The four bits are used to transfer process data. In parallel, the control can
start a diagnostic request via AS-i.P0.
The following default settings are available; both work with profile 7.F.E.
• Default setting 30: Standard Single Slave mode
• Default setting 32: Modified Single Slave mode

Default setting 30: Standard Single Slave mode


In standard addressing, the control specifies the speed setpoint via the motor control bits (AS-
i.DO0 … AS-i.DO3).

Control -> converter

• AS-i.DO0 -> p1020 = 2093.0 Fixed speed bit 0


• AS-i.DO1 -> p1021 = 2093.1 Fixed speed bit 1
• AS-i.DO2 -> p1022 = 2093.2 Fixed speed bit 2
• AS-i.DO3 -> p1023 = 2093.3 Fixed speed bit 3

Table 7-3 Fixed speeds via the motor control bits (Page 236).

Converter -> control


If the control specifies the speed setpoint, the converter replies:

• p2080[0] = 53.13 -> AS-i.DI0 Operational enable for PLC


• p2080[1] = 899.11 -> AS-i.DI1 Pulses enabled
• p2080[2] = 722.0 -> AS-i.DI2 State DI0
• p2080[3] = 722.1 -> AS-i.DI3 State DI1

If the control sends a diagnostic request via AS-i.P0, the converter replies with the currently
pending fault or alarm messages.
Table 7-6 Alarm and fault messages via RP0 … RP3 from the converter to the AS-i
master (Page 237).

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 231
Communication via AS-i – only for G110M and G115D
7.2 Single Slave mode

Default setting 32: Modified Single Slave mode


In Single Slave mode with modified addressing the control specifies the following:

Control -> converter

• AS-i.DO0 -> p3330.0 = 2093.0 ON clockwise / OFF 1


• AS-i.DO1 -> p3331.0 = 2093.1 ON counter-clockwise / OFF 1
• AS-i.DO2 -> p0810 = 2093.2 Speed via potentiometer or AI0
• AS-i.DO3 -> p2104 = 2093.3 Acknowledge errors with a positive edge
p0852 = 2093.3 Operating enable, if p2093.3 = 1

Converter -> control


The converter sends as response:

• p2080[0] = 899.0 -> AS-i.DI0 Ready for switching on


• p2080[1] = 807.0 -> AS-i.DI1 Control priority
• p2080[2] = 722.0 -> AS-i.DI2 State DI0
• p2080[3] = 722.1 -> AS-i.DI3 State DI1

If an alarm or fault is pending in the converter, it sends a warning or fault message.


Table 7-6 Alarm and fault messages via RP0 … RP3 from the converter to the AS-i
master (Page 237).

Scaling factors for the speed


The scaling factor is specified via AS-i.P0 … AS-i.P3. A diagnostic request is also performed
when AS-i.P0 is sent.
This means, if the control specifies a scaling factor and an alarm or fault is pending in the
converter, it sends the current alarm or fault messages and accepts simultaneously the sent
value consisting of AS-i.P0 … AS-i.P3 as new scaling factor.

• AS-i.P0 Scaling factor bit 0


• AS-i.P1 Scaling factor bit 1
• AS-i.P2 Scaling factor bit 2
• AS-i.P3 Scaling factor bit 3

Table 7-4 Scaling of the speed setpoint via AS-i.P0 … AS-i.P3 (Page 236).

Fieldbuses
232 Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG
Communication via AS-i – only for G110M and G115D
7.3 Dual Slave mode

7.3 Dual Slave mode


In Dual Slave mode, eight bits are available for the communication between the AS-i master
and the converter. The eight bits are used to transfer process data. In parallel, the control can
start a diagnostic request via AS-i.P0.
The following default settings are possible:
• Default setting 31: Dual Slave mode with fixed setpoints
• Default setting 34: Dual Slave mode with setpoint via AS-i field bus

Default setting 31: Dual Slave mode with fixed setpoints


The control accesses the two slaves of the converter each via four bits.
Via slave 2, in accordance with profile 7.A.E, the control specifies the speed setpoint via the
motor control bits (AS-i.DO0 … AS-i.DO2).
Via slave 1, the control sends data in cyclical or acyclical mode, in accordance with profile
7.A.5.
The control requires one bit per slave in order to specify the slave.

Default setting 31, slave 2 with profile 7.A.E: Control -> converter

• AS-i.DO0 -> p1020.0 = 2093.0 Fixed speed bit 0


• AS-i.DO1 -> p1021.0 = 2093.1 Fixed speed bit 1
• AS-i.DO2 -> p1022.0 = 2093.2 Fixed speed bit 2
• AS-i.DO3 -> Select slave A or slave B, interconnected internally

Table 7-5 Fixed speeds via the motor control bits and response in the converter
(Page 237).
If the control specifies the speed setpoint, the converter replies:

Default setting 31, slave 2 with profile 7.A.E: Converter -> control

• p2080[0] = 53.13 PLC ready to switch on -> AS-i.DI0


• p2080[1] = 899.11 Pulses enabled -> AS-i.DI1
• p2080[2] = 722.0 State DI0 -> AS-i.DI2
• p2080[3] = 722.1 State DI1 -> AS-i.DI3

If the control sends a diagnostic request via AS-i.P0, the converter replies with the currently
pending fault or alarm messages.
Table 7-6 Alarm and fault messages via RP0 … RP3 from the converter to the AS-i
master (Page 237).

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 233
Communication via AS-i – only for G110M and G115D
7.3 Dual Slave mode

Default setting 31, slave 1 with profile 7.A.5: Control -> converter

• AS-i.DO0 -> Time signal for the CTT2 transfer from the AS-i master
• AS-i.DO1 -> Data bit for the CTT2 transfer, four bytes cyclically or acyclically via
PIV. The reading and writing of parameters is possible via the PIV.
Because data is transferred bit-by-bit, the read and write process is
very slow.
• AS-i.DO2 -> p0881 = 2093.4 Override quick stop
• AS-i.DO3 -> Select slave A or slave B, interconnected internally

Default setting 31, slave 1 with profile 7.A.5: Converter -> control

• p2080[4] = 722.2 State DI2 -> AS-i.DI0


• p2080[5] = 722.3 State DI3 -> AS-i.DI1
• Serial data transfer CTT2, four bytes cyclically or acyclically via PIV. -> AS-i.DI2
The reading and writing of parameters is possible via the PIV.
Because data is transferred bit-by-bit, the read and write process is
very slow.
• Time signal for the CTT2 transfer to the AS-i master -> AS-i.DI3

Default setting 34: Dual Slave mode with setpoint via AS-i field bus
The control accesses the two slaves of the converter each via four bits.
Via slave 2, in accordance with profile 7.A.E, the control specifies the commands listed below
(AS-i.DO0 … AS-i.DO2).
Via slave 1, the control sends the command for quick stop and the data in cyclical or acyclical
mode.
The control requires one bit per slave in order to specify the slave.

Default setting 34, slave 2 with profile 7.A.E: Control -> converter

• AS-i.DO0 -> ON / OFF 1


• AS-i.DO1 -> OFF 2
• AS-i.DO2 -> Acknowledge fault
• AS-i.DO3 -> Select slave A or slave B, interconnected internally

If the control specifies the speed setpoint, the converter replies:

Fieldbuses
234 Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG
Communication via AS-i – only for G110M and G115D
7.3 Dual Slave mode

Default setting 34, slave 2 with profile 7.A.E: Converter -> control

• p2080[0] = 53.13 PLC ready to switch on -> AS-i.DI0


• p2080[1] = 899.11 Pulses enabled -> AS-i.DI1
• p2080[2] = 722.0 State DI0 -> AS-i.DI2
• p2080[3] = 722.1 State DI1 -> AS-i.DI3

If the control sends a diagnostic request via AS-i.P0, the converter replies with the currently
pending fault or alarm messages.
Table 7-6 Alarm and fault messages via RP0 … RP3 from the converter to the AS-i
master (Page 237).

Default setting 34, slave 1 with profile 7.A.5: Control -> converter

• AS-i.DO0 -> Time signal for the CTT2 transfer from the AS-i master
• AS-i.DO1 -> Data bit for the CTT2 transfer, four bytes cyclically or acyclically via
PIV. The reading and writing of parameters is possible via the PIV.
Because data is transferred bit-by-bit, the read and write process is
very slow.
• AS-i.DO2 -> p0881 = 2093.4 Override quick stop
• AS-i.DO3 -> Select slave A or slave B, interconnected internally

Default setting 34, slave 1 with profile 7.A.5: Converter -> control

• p2080[4] = 722.2 State DI2 -> AS-i.DI0


• p2080[5] = 722.3 State DI3 -> AS-i.DI1
• Serial data transfer CTT2, four bytes cyclically or acyclically via PIV. -> AS-i.DI2
The reading and writing of parameters is possible via the PIV. Because
data is transferred bit-by-bit, the read and write process is very slow.
• Time signal for the CTT2 transfer to the AS-i master -> AS-i.DI3

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 235
Communication via AS-i – only for G110M and G115D
7.4 Assignment tables

7.4 Assignment tables

Fixed speeds - Single Slave

Table 7- 3 Fixed speeds via the motor control bits

AS-i.DO3 AS-i.DO2 AS-i.DO1 AS-i.DO0 Response in the converter


0 0 0 0 OFF1
0 0 0 1 On + fixed speed 1 (factory setting: 1500 rpm)
0 0 1 0 On + fixed speed 2 (factory setting: -1500 rpm)
0 0 1 1 On + fixed speed 3 (factory setting: 300 rpm)
0 1 0 0 On + fixed speed 4 (factory setting: 450 rpm)
0 1 0 1 On + fixed speed 5 (factory setting: 600 rpm)
0 1 1 0 On + fixed speed 6 (factory setting: 750 rpm)
0 1 1 1 On + fixed speed 7 (factory setting: 900 rpm)
1 0 0 0 On + fixed speed 8 (factory setting: 1050 rpm)
1 0 0 1 On + fixed speed 9 (factory setting: 1200 rpm)
1 0 1 0 On + fixed speed 10 (factory setting: 1350 rpm)
1 0 1 1 On + fixed speed 11 (factory setting: 1500 rpm)
1 1 0 0 On + fixed speed 12 (factory setting: 1650 rpm)
1 1 0 1 On + fixed speed 13 (factory setting: 1800 rpm)
1 1 1 0 On + fixed speed 14 (factory setting: 1950 rpm)
1 1 1 1 Acknowledge fault or OFF2

Modified addressing - scaling factors

Table 7- 4 Scaling of the speed setpoint via AS-i.P0 … AS-i.P3

AS-i.P3 AS-i.P2 AS-i.P1 AS-i.P0 Scaling factor Frequency (Hz)


1 1 1 1 1 50
1 1 1 0 0.9 45
1 1 0 1 0.8 40
1 1 0 0 0.7 35
1 0 1 1 0.6 30
1 0 1 0 0.5 25
1 0 0 1 0.45 22.5
1 0 0 0 0.4 20
0 1 1 1 0.35 17.5
0 1 1 0 0.3 15
0 1 0 1 0.25 12.5
0 1 0 0 0.2 10
0 0 1 1 0.15 7.5
0 0 1 0 0.1 5
0 0 0 1 0.07 3.5
0 0 0 0 0.05 2.5

Fieldbuses
236 Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG
Communication via AS-i – only for G110M and G115D
7.4 Assignment tables

Fixed speeds - Dual Slave

Table 7- 5 Fixed speeds via the motor control bits and response in the converter

AS-i.DO2 AS-i.DO1 AS-i.DO0 Response in the converter


0 0 0 OFF1
0 0 1 On + fixed speed 1 (factory setting: 1500 rpm)
0 1 0 On + fixed speed 2 (factory setting: -1500 rpm)
0 1 1 On + fixed speed 3 (factory setting: 300 rpm)
1 0 0 On + fixed speed 4 (factory setting: 450 rpm)
1 0 1 On + fixed speed 5 (factory setting: 600 rpm)
1 1 0 On + fixed speed 6 (factory setting: 750 rpm)
1 1 1 Acknowledge fault or OFF2

Alarm and fault messages

Table 7- 6 Alarm and fault messages via RP0 … RP3 from the converter to the AS-i master

RP3 RP2 RP1 RP0 AS-i.P0 = 0 -> alarm messages AS-i.P0 = 1 -> faults
0 0 0 0 No alarm No fault
0 0 0 1 not used Temperature rise F30004, F30012,
F30013, F30024, F30025, F30036
0 0 1 0 not used not used
0 0 1 1 No load (A07929) not used
0 1 0 0 Temperature rise (A05000, I2t overload (F30005, F07936)
A05004, A05006, A07012,
A07015)
0 1 0 1 Overvoltage (A07400, A30502) Equipment malfunction (F01000 ...
F01257)
0 1 1 0 Keyswitch off (A03560)1) not used
0 1 1 1 Undervoltage (A07402, A30016) Motor-PTC sensor malfunction
(F07011, F07016)
1 0 0 0 I2t overload (A07805) Overvoltage (F30002, F30011)
1 0 0 1 not used not used
1 0 1 0 LOCAL Mode active (A03561)1) not used
1 0 1 1 not used Undervoltage (F30003, F07802)
1 1 0 0 not used Short-circuit at the output (F30001,
F30017, F30021, F07801, F07807,
F07900)
1 1 0 1 Motor phase loss (A30015)2) Motor phase loss (F30015, F07902)
1 1 1 0 not used Safety fault (F016xx)
1 1 1 1 Other alarms Other faults
1) Only for G115D
2) Only if F30015 was reparameterized as an alarm

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 237
Communication via AS-i – only for G110M and G115D
7.5 Cyclic and acyclic communication via CTT2

7.5 Cyclic and acyclic communication via CTT2


Via CTT2 (Combined Transaction Type 2), both cyclical and acyclical communication is
performed via AS-i. Because only one channel is available (AS-i.DO1 master -> slave or AS-
i.DI3 slave -> master), a concurrent cyclical and acyclical data exchange is not possible.
The communication type (cyclical or acyclical) is always coded in the first byte in accordance
with the following table.

Table 7- 7 CTT2 commands

Code Explanation/meaning Followed by


(hex)
Cyclic communication
Access to analog values via DS140 … DS147. See CP 343−2 / CP 4 bytes: PWE1, PWE2
343−2 P AS−Interface master 4 bytes: PWE1, PWE2
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/5581657),
Chapter 4
Acyclic communication - standard
10 hex Read request: Master -> slave 2 bytes: Index, length
50 hex Read request OK: Slave -> master Index, data
90 hex Read request failed: Slave -> master 1 byte: Standard error code (3
hex)
11 hex Write request: Master -> slave Index, length, data
51 hex Write request OK: Slave -> master
91 hex Write request failed: Slave -> master 1 byte: Standard error code (3
hex)
Acyclic communication - manufacturer-specific
12 hex Read request: Master -> slave Index, length
52 hex Read request OK: Slave -> master Data
92 hex Read request failed: Slave -> master Fault object
13 hex Write request: Master -> slave Index, length, data
53 hex Write request OK: Slave -> master
93 hex Write request failed: Slave -> master Fault object
1D hex Exchange request: Master -> slave Index, read length, write length,
write data
5D hex Exchange request OK: Slave -> master PKE, index, n-2 data
9D hex Exchange request faulty: Slave -> master Fault object

Fieldbuses
238 Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG
Communication via AS-i – only for G110M and G115D
7.5 Cyclic and acyclic communication via CTT2

If an acyclical request cannot be executed by the converter, it replies with one of the
following error messages.

Error message Meaning


0 No fault
1 Invalid index
2 Incorrect length
3 Request not implemented
4 Busy (the request could not be processed completely within the time window, retry
later)
5 Last acyclical request was not confirmed
6 Invalid subindex
7 "Selective read request" command missing

7.5.1 Cyclic communication

Converter -> master


The converter cyclically transfers the data from p2051[1] and p2051[2] in four bytes to the
master. You can process these four bytes in the control as for analog data. Refer to the
documentation for the AS-i master for detailed information about access to analog data.
If you selected default setting 31 or 34 during the commissioning, the two indexes are
interconnected as follows:
• p2051[1] = 63: Smoothed actual speed value
• p2051[2] = 27: Absolute smoothed actual current value
The values for transfer are normalized in accordance with the Profidrive N2 data type. Using
p2051[1] and p2051[2] you can interconnect any other or connector parameters and transfer
to the control.

Master -> converter


The master transfers the data in the "Combined Transaction Type 2" (CTT2) to the converter
and writes it to r2050[1] and r2050[2].
To process these values in the converter, you must appropriately interconnect r2050[1] and
r2050[2] in the converter. This means, when the control sends the speed setpoint, you must
interconnect parameter p1070 (source for the main setpoint) with r2050 as follows:
p1070[0] = 2050[1]

Note
Internal interconnection with default setting 34
If, when commissioning, you select "Default setting 34", then the main setpoint is internally
interconnected with r2050[1].

Once a setpoint has been transferred completely, the setpoint present in the control will be
transferred as next setpoint. Any setpoint changes made during the transfer are not
considered.

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 239
Communication via AS-i – only for G110M and G115D
7.5 Cyclic and acyclic communication via CTT2

7.5.2 Acyclic communication - standard


This type of acyclical communication supports the ID read request and the diagnostic read
request. All other requests receive the "request not implemented" message response.
• ID request:
– Master -> slave
– Slave -> master
• Diagnostic request:
– Master -> slave
– Slave -> master no error ;
Slave -> master general error
The following repsonse is issued for all other write or read requests:
• Read requests
• Write requests

7.5.3 Acyclic communication - manufacturer-specific


The manufacturer-specific acyclical communication is performed via data record 47 in PIV
format. The PIV format structure is identical with that for the USS parameter channel.
USS parameter channel (Page 122).
To reduce the transfer volume, there is not only the "normal" "data exchange" PIV
mechanism, but also the "Read data" and "Write data" commands.
• Data exchange:
– Control -> converter request
– Converter -> control response
• Read data:
The converter sends a read command, and the data of the last exchange request or write
request is transferred from the converter to the control.
• Write data
Write OK: -> 53 hex.
Because the PIV transfer protocol specifies the transfer direction independently, all
parameters can be transferred as data exchange request/response. Requests for reading and
writing data are included primarily to reduce the transferred data volume for the repeated
reading or writing of parameters.

Fieldbuses
240 Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG
Communication via AS-i – only for G110M and G115D
7.5 Cyclic and acyclic communication via CTT2

Data exchange

Reading data
The data for the last write or exchange request is read

Writing data

In the event of a fault, the converter sends the following telegram as response to the master:
.
Value for PWE: Fault table from USS parameter channel (Page 122).

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 241
Communication via AS-i – only for G110M and G115D
7.5 Cyclic and acyclic communication via CTT2

Fieldbuses
242 Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG
Appendix A
A.1 Application examples for communication with STEP7
Application examples for communication with STEP 7 can be found in the following manual:
"Fieldbuses" function manual, edition 09/2017
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109751350)

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 243
Appendix
A.2 Manuals and technical support

A.2 Manuals and technical support

A.2.1 Overview of the manuals


You can find manuals here with additional information for downloading
• CU250S-2 operating instructions
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109482997)
Installing, commissioning and maintaining the converter. Advanced commissioning

• CU240B/E-2 operating instructions


(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109482994)
Installing, commissioning and maintaining the converter. Advanced commissioning

• CU230P-2 operating instructions


(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109751316)
Installing, commissioning and maintaining the converter. Advanced commissioning

• SINAMICS G120C operating instructions.


(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109482993)
Installing, commissioning and maintaining the converter. Advanced commissioning

• SINAMICS G110M operating instructions


(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109478193)
Installing, commissioning and maintaining the converter. Advanced commissioning

• SINAMICS G115D Operating Instructions


Installing, commissioning and maintaining the converter. Advanced commissioning

• Operating instructions SINAMICS G120D with CU240D-2


(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109477366)
Installing, commissioning and maintaining the converter. Advanced commissioning

Fieldbuses
244 Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG
Appendix
A.2 Manuals and technical support

• Operating instructions SINAMICS G120D with CU250D-2


(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109477365)
Installing, commissioning and maintaining the converter. Advanced commissioning

• SIMATIC ET200proFC-2 operating instructions


(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109478246)
Installing, commissioning and maintaining the converter. Advanced commissioning

• "Safety Integrated" function manual


(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109751320)
Configuring PROFIsafe.
Installing, commissioning and operating failsafe functions of the converter.

• "Fieldbus" function manual


(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109751350)
Configuring fieldbuses (this manual)

• "Basic positioner" function manual


(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109477922)
Commissioning the basic positioner

• CU250S-2 List Manual


(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109482981)
List of all parameters, alarms and faults, graphic function diagrams.

• CU240B/E-2 List Manual


(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109482961)
List of all parameters, alarms and faults, graphic function diagrams.

• CU230P-2 List Manual


(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109751313)
List of all parameters, alarms and faults, graphic function diagrams.

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 245
Appendix
A.2 Manuals and technical support

• List manual SINAMICS G120D


(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109477255)
List of all parameters, alarms and faults, graphic function diagrams.

• SINAMICS G120C List Manual


(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109482977)
List of all parameters, alarms and faults, graphic function diagrams.

• SINAMICS G110M List Manual


(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109478707)
List of all parameters, alarms and faults, graphic function diagrams.

• SIMATIC ET 200pro FC-2 List Manual


(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109478711)
List of all parameters, alarms and faults, graphic function diagrams.

• SIMATIC ET 200pro operating instructions


(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/21210852)
Distributed ET 200pro I/O system

• SIMATIC ET 200pro motor starters manual


(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/22332388)
ET 200pro motor starters

• AS-Interface system manual


(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/26250840)

Fieldbuses
246 Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG
Appendix
A.2 Manuals and technical support

Finding the most recent edition of a manual


If there a multiple editions of a manual, select the latest edition:

Configuring a manual
Further information about the configurability of manuals is available in the Internet:
MyDocumentationManager
(https://www.industry.siemens.com/topics/global/en/planning-
efficiency/documentation/Pages/default.aspx).
Select "Display and configure" and add the manual to your "mySupport-documentation":

Not all manuals can be configured.


The configured manual can be exported in RTF, PDF or XML format.

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 247
Appendix
A.2 Manuals and technical support

A.2.2 Configuring support

Catalog
Ordering data and technical information for the converters SINAMICS G.

Catalogs for download or online catalog (Industry Mall):


Everything about SINAMICS G120 (www.siemens.en/sinamics-g120)

SIZER
The configuration tool for SINAMICS, MICROMASTER and DYNAVERT T drives, motor starters,
as well as SINUMERIK, SIMOTION controllers and SIMATIC technology

SIZER on DVD:
Article number: 6SL3070-0AA00-0AG0
Download SIZER (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/54992004)

EMC (electromagnetic compatibility) technical overview


Standards and guidelines, EMC-compliant control cabinet design

EMC overview (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/103704610)

EMC Guidelines configuration manual


EMC-compliant control cabinet design, potential equalization and cable routing

EMC installation guideline


(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/60612658)

Safety Integrated for novices technical overview


Application examples for SINAMICS G drives with Safety Integrated

Safety Integrated for novices


(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/80561520)

Fieldbuses
248 Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG
Appendix
A.2 Manuals and technical support

A.2.3 Product Support

Overview
You can find additional information about the product on the Internet:
Product support (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/)
This URL provides the following:
• Up-to-date product information (product announcements)
• FAQs
• Downloads
• The Newsletter contains the latest information on the products you use.
• The Knowledge Manager (Intelligent Search) helps you find the documents you need.
• Users and specialists from around the world share their experience and knowledge in the
Forum.
• You can find your local representative for Automation & Drives via our contact database
under "Contact & Partner".
• Information about local service, repair, spare parts and much more can be found under
"Services".
If you have any technical questions, use the online form in the "Support Request" menu:

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 249
Appendix
A.2 Manuals and technical support

Fieldbuses
250 Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG
Index

A E
Acyclic communication, 49 EMCY, 178
Application example, 47, 83, 83, 153 Extending the telegram, 33
Reading and writing parameters cyclically via
PROFIBUS, 47
F
Function Manual, 244
C
CAN
COB, 178 G
COB ID, 179
GSD (Generic Station Description), 84
Device profile, 178
GSDML (Generic Station Description Markup
EMCY, 178
Language), 71
NMT, 178
SDO, 178
SYNC, 178
H
CANopen communication profile, 178
Catalog, 248 Hotline, 249
Checklist
PROFINET, 71, 93
COB, 178 I
COB ID, 179
IND (page index), 39, 43, 44, 124, 125
Communication
Industry Mall, 248
Acyclic, 49
Cyclically, 17
Configuring support, 248
L
Control word
Control word 1, 22, 128 List Manual, 244
Control word 2, 24
Control word 3, 25
Control word 2 (STW2), 24 M
Control word 3 (STW3), 25
Maximum cable length
Cyclic communication, 20, 32
Modbus, 133
PROFIBUS, 84
PROFINET, 70
D
USS, 117
Data set 47 (DS), 49 MELD_NAMUR (fault word according to the VIK-Namur
DC braking, 25 definition), 27
Device profile, 178
Direct data exchange, 48
Drive-independent communication objects, 204 N
DS 47, 49
Network management (NMT service), 180
NMT, 178

Fieldbuses
Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG 251
Index

O U
Operating instruction, 3 USS (universal serial interface), 117, 122
Operating Instructions, 244

Z
P ZSW1 (status word 1), 23
Page index, 125 ZSW3 (status word 3), 26
Parameter channel, 37, 122 ZWST1 (status word 1), 130
IND, 39, 43, 44, 124, 125
Parameter index, 39, 43, 44, 124, 125
Parameter number, 39, 43, 44, 124
Parameter value, 49
PDO, 187
Procedure, 3
PROFIBUS, 83
PROFIenergy, 74
Pulse cancellation, 22, 128
Pulse enable, 22, 128

Q
Questions, 249

R
RS485 interface, 116

S
SDO, 178, 184
SDO services, 183
SIZER, 248
Status word
Status word 1, 23, 130
Status word 2, 24
Status word 3, 26
Status word 1 (ZSW2), 24
STW1 (control word 1), 22, 128
Subindex, 39, 43, 44, 124, 125
Support, 249
Switching on inhibited, 22, 129
Symbols, 3
SYNC, 178

T
Technology controller, 25

Fieldbuses
252 Function Manual, 11/2020, FW V4.7 SP13, A5E34229197B AG

You might also like